Menu

2 Corinthians 10:15 — Word Study

Depth

N1904οὐκ εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα καυχώμενοι ἐν ἀλλοτρίοις κόποις, ἐλπίδα δὲ ἔχοντες αὐξανομένης τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν μεγαλυνθῆναι κατὰ τὸν κανόνα ἡμῶν εἰς περισσείαν,

BSAnotou toeis the [things]ho beyond measureametros [immoderately, excessively] boastingkauchaomai [glory in, take pride in] inen others’allotrios [another's, someone else's] labors,kopos [work, toil] hopeelpis [have expectation, trust] howeverde havingechō increasingauxanō [grows, expands] theho faithpistis [trust, confidence] of yousu amongen yousu to be enlargedmegalunō [be enlarged, magnified, abundantly, in excess] according tokata theho areakanōn [sphere of ministry, region of service] of usegō toeis excess,perisseia

Word
Listen & take away2 Corinthians 10
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 15 is in this chapter.
Greek ↓ Download MP3 Nestle 1904 — the very text on this page — read by Andy Martin in Erasmian pronunciation.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (perisseia) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
2 Corinthians 10:15quick helps
In a sentencePaul expresses that he does not boast in the work of others, but hopes for growth in influence as the faith of the Corinthians increases.
Who is speakingThe Apostle Paul, addressing the church in Corinth.
Where we areIn the context of Paul's defense of his ministry and the boundaries of his influence.
The hard wordκαυχώμενοι
Take awayPaul's hope is tied to the growth of the Corinthians' faith.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subjectκαυχάομαι verbκαυχάομαι The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — 2 Corinthians 10:15

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — Paul's Defense of His Ministrygenerated

14We are not overstepping our bounds, as if we had not come to you. Indeed, we were the first to reach you with the gospel of Christ.
15Neither do we boast beyond our limits in the labors of others. But we hope that as your faith increases, our area of influence among you will greatly increase as well,
16so that we can preach the gospel in the regions beyond you. Then we will not be boasting in the work already done in another man’s territory.
17Rather, “Let him who boasts boast in the Lord.”

2 Corinthians 10:15 shows Paul clarifying his position regarding boasting in ministry. He emphasizes that he does not take credit for the work of others but expresses hope that as the faith of the Corinthians grows, so will his influence among them. This reflects a relational dynamic where spiritual growth leads to increased ministry effectiveness, similar to the themes found in 1 Corinthians 3:6 and Philippians 1:5.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
12 Corinthians 10:13We, however, will not boast beyond our limits, but only within the field of influence that God has assigned to us—a field that reaches even to you.
2Romans 15:20In this way I have aspired to preach the gospel where Christ was not known, so that I would not be building on someone else’s foundation.

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 2 references, hung on the phrase they belong to


The Key Word καυχώμενοι, kauchaomaigenerated

The word καυχάομαι (transliterated as kauchaomai) is a present participle meaning 'boasting' or 'glorying.' It is used in various contexts to express pride or joy, often in relation to one's achievements or the achievements of others.

In this verse, it indicates that Paul is consciously avoiding boasting about the ministry efforts of others, focusing instead on the hope that comes from the Corinthians' growing faith.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The verse is rendered in the Berean Standard Bible as 'Neither do we boast beyond our limits in the labors of others.' This is consistent with the KJV and ASV, which also emphasize the idea of not boasting in others' work.

However, the translations differ in how they express the concept of hope. The BSB uses 'hope,' while the KJV opts for 'having hope,' and the ASV phrases it as 'but having hope that.'


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main clause is governed by the verb καυχώμενοι, boasting, which is negated by οὐκ, not. This is followed by a subordinate clause that expresses the hope tied to the Corinthians' faith.

The structure includes a series of phrases that elaborate on the relationship between Paul's ministry and the faith of the Corinthians, showing a clear cause-and-effect dynamic.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

The word ἀλλοτρίοις (allotrios), meaning 'others’,' appears in the Septuagint to translate various Hebrew terms that convey the idea of being a stranger or foreign, such as זוּר (zur) and נָכְרִי (nokri). This choice emphasizes the distinction between the speaker's work and that of outsiders.

The term κόποις (kopos), meaning 'labors,' is used in the LXX to render Hebrew words like עָמָל (amal), which conveys toil or effort. Additionally, ἐλπίδα (elpis), meaning 'hope,' translates the Hebrew תִּקְוָה (tikvah), suggesting a confident expectation tied to faith, which is further emphasized by πίστεως (pistis), meaning 'faith,' that translates אֱמוּנָה (emunah), indicating steadfastness. The use of μεγαλυνθῆναι (megalunō), meaning 'to be enlarged,' reflects the desire for growth in influence as faith increases, paralleling the Hebrew גָּדַל (gadal), which denotes becoming great.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

2 Corinthians 10:15 states that Paul does not boast about the work of others. Instead, he expresses hope that as the faith of the Corinthians grows, his influence will also increase. This highlights the importance of faith in the growth of ministry.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does Paul mean by 'boasting in the labors of others'?

Paul is indicating that he does not take credit for the work done by others but focuses on his own ministry efforts.

How does the growth of faith relate to Paul's influence?

Paul believes that as the Corinthians' faith increases, it will create opportunities for greater ministry and influence in their lives.

Why is boasting considered negative in this context?

Boasting can detract from the true source of ministry success, which is God working through individuals, rather than personal achievements.

What is the significance of the phrase 'area of influence'?

This phrase refers to the scope of Paul's ministry and the impact he hopes to have on the Corinthians as their faith grows.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. In what ways can I ensure that my ministry efforts do not overshadow the work of others?
  2. How can I encourage the growth of faith in those around me?
  3. What does it mean to have a healthy understanding of my influence in ministry?
  4. How can I apply Paul's example of humility in my own life?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Several early church Fathers comment on this verse, emphasizing the importance of knowledge and faith in Paul's ministry.

Clement of AlexandriaThe Stromata Book 6 c. 150–215
The primacy of knowledge the apostle shows to those capable of reflection, in writing to those Greeks of Corinth, in the following terms: "But having hope, when your faith is increased,
Early Church Fathers on 2 Corinthians 10 →
Clement of AlexandriaThe Stromata Book 6 c. 150–215
The primacy of knowledge the apostle shows to those capable of reflection, in writing to those Greeks of Corinth, in the following terms: "But having hope, when your faith is increased,
Early Church Fathers on 2 Corinthians 10 →
John ChrysostomHomily 22 on 2 Corinthians c. 347–407
"Not glorying beyond" our "measure," that is, "in other men's labors, but having hope that as your faith groweth, we shall be magnified in you according to our province unto further abundance,
Early Church Fathers on 2 Corinthians 10 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on 2 Corinthians 10:15 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

Not boasting of things without our measure,.... The apostle here asserts what he had done before, 2 Corinthians 10:13 with a view to explain it, as he does, saying, that is of other men's labours;

Read John Gill on 2 Corinthians 10 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

Not boasting of things without our measure, that is, of other men's labours; but having hope, when your faith is increased, that we shall be enlarged by you according to our rule abundantly, Not

Read Robert Jamieson on 2 Corinthians 10 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

So that although we have boasted of you, we have not boasted of things without our measure; that is, of things that are not, or (as the apostle expounds himself) of things that were not done by him but by other men; for his line did reach unto them, and his labours had been employed and made successful amongst them. And he declares his hope, that when the gospel should have had its full success amongst them, and their faith should be increased, ( either by the addition of more persons to the church amongst them, or by the perfecting of their faith, and other graces), they, who were apostles and the ministers of the gospel to them, should by it be magnified, or made great; to wit, by their…

Read Matthew Poole on 2 Corinthians 10 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

15 Not boasting of things without our measure, that is, of other men’ s labours; but having hope, when your faith is increased, that we shall be enlarged by you according to our rule abundantly, Ver. 15. Not boasting of things] Ammianus Marcellinus tells of one Lampadius, a great person in Rome, who through all parts of the city, where other men had bestowed cost in building, he would set up his own name, not as a repairer of the work, but as the chief builder. Of the same fault Trajan the emperor is said to have been guilty; whence he was commonly called Herba parietina, or Wall Wort.

Read John Trapp on 2 Corinthians 10 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(15) Not boasting of things without our measure . . .—The words are not merely defensive. He presses home the charge of intrusion. They, not he, were finding ground for their boasts in other men’s labours. The context leads, however, to the conclusion that it was a charge that had been brought against him. They had spoken of him as pushing on from point to point, as with a measureless ambition. Perhaps the fact that he had worked at Antioch, where the gospel had been preached by men of Cyprus and Cyrene (Acts 11:20), at Troas, where it had been preached by St. Luke (see Notes on 2 Corinthians 2:12; Acts 16:8), to the Romans whom he found at Corinth, and who, like Aquila and Priscilla, had…

Read Charles John Ellicott on 2 Corinthians 10 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 15. Not boasting of things without our measure] We speak only of the work which God has done by us; for we have never attempted to enter into other men's labours, and we study to convert those regions assigned to us by the Holy Spirit. We enter the course lawfully, and run according to rule. See above. When your faith is increased] When you receive more of the life and power of godliness, and when you can better spare me to go to other places. We shall be enlarged by you] μεγαλυνθηναι probably signifies here to be praised or commended; and the sense would be this; We hope that shortly, on your gaining an increase of true religion, after your long distractions and divisions, you will…

Read AdamClarke on 2 Corinthians 10 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

15. not boasting of things without our measure] The Apostle now repeats what he has before said in 2 Corinthians 10:13, but directs his remarks more pointedly against the false teachers by adding ‘in other men’s labours.’ For they, as Meyer remarks, were adorning themselves with strange feathers as they intruded themselves into other men’s spheres of work. See also for St Paul’s line of conduct Romans 15:20, Galatians 2:9.when your faith is increased] Two reasons may be assigned for this reservation; (1) that as we have seen (ch. 2 Corinthians 2:12-13), St Paul could not settle himself to any other work while the Corinthian Church was in such an unsatisfactory condition, and (2) that the…

Read Cambridge on 2 Corinthians 10 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

Not boasting of things without our measure - There is here probably an allusion to the false teachers at Corinth. They had come after Paul had been there, and had entered into his labors.

Read Albert Barnes on 2 Corinthians 10 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

Neither do we boast beyond our limits in the labors of others. But we hope that as your faith increases, our area of influence among you will greatly increase as well,

WEBWorld English Bible2000

not boasting beyond proper limits in other men’s labors, but having hope that as your faith grows, we will be abundantly enlarged by you in our sphere of influence,

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

Neither do we boast beyond our limits in the labors of others. But we hope that as your faith increases, our area of influence among you will greatly increase as well,

NETBNew English Translation2006

Nor do we boast beyond certain limits in the work done by others, but we hope that as your faith continues to grow, our work may be greatly expanded among you according to our limits,

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

Not boasting of things without our measure, that is, of other men’s labours; but having hope, when your faith is increased, that we shall be enlarged by you according to our rule abundantly,

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

not glorying beyond our measure, that is, in other men’s labors; but having hope that, as your faith groweth, we shall be magnified in you according to our province unto further abundance,

RVARevised Version, American1894

not glorying beyond our measure, that is, in other men’s labours; but having hope that, as your faith groweth, we shall be magnified in you according to our province unto further abundance,

NWBWebster's Bible1833

Not boasting of things without our measure, that is , of other men's labors; but having hope, when your faith is increased, that we shall be enlarged by you, according to our rule abundantly,

GNVGeneva Bible1599

Not boasting of things which are without our measure: that is, of other mens labours: and we hope, when your faith shall increase, to bee magnified by you according to our line aboundantly,

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

not boasting out of measure in other people's labours, but having hope, your faith increasing, to be enlarged amongst you, according to our rule, yet more abundantly

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

not boasting of the things not measured, in other men's labours, and having hope — your faith increasing — in you to be enlarged, according to our line — into abundance,

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

not boasting of the things not measured, in other men’s labors, and having hope—your faith increasing—in you to be enlarged, according to our line—into abundance,

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

We have not boasted beyond limits about the labors of others. Instead, we expect that as your faith continues to grow, our work among you will greatly expand.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

Not glorying beyond measure in other men’s labours; but having hope of your increasing faith, to be magnified in you according to our rule abundantly;

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

We're not boasting in extravagant terms that can't be measured, claiming credit for what others have done. On the contrary, we hope that as your trust in God grows, our work among you will greatly increase.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

Not taking credit to ourselves for what is not our business, that is, for the work of others; but having hope that, with the growth of your faith, we may get the credit for an increase which is the effect of our work,

Word by word, the decisions they made

καυχώμενοιkauchaomai boasting G2744 2 different renderings
boastingDBY FBV GNV KJV LSV NWB WEB YLT
we boastBSB MSB NETB
κόποις,kopos labors, G2873 2 different renderings
laborsASV BSB LSV MSB NWB ULB WEB
workBBE FBV NETB
ἐλπίδαelpis hope G1680 2 different renderings
hopeASV BBE BSB DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA WEB YLT
trustFBV
ἔχοντεςechō having G2192 3 different renderings
havingASV BBE DBY DRA KJV LSV NWB RVA WEB YLT
we haveULB
haveFBV
αὐξανομένηςauxanō increasing G837 3 different renderings
increasingDBY DRA LSV YLT
increasedKJV NWB
growsFBV WEB
πίστεωςpistis faith G4102 2 different renderings
faithASV BBE BSB DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
trustFBV

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseclauseadverbialοὐκnotprepositional phrase · adverbialεἰςtonoun phraseτὰthe thingsἄμετραbeyond measureverbκαυχώμενοιboastingprepositional phrase · adverbialἐνinnoun phraseἀλλοτρίοιςothers’κόποιςlaborsδὲhoweverclauseobjectἐλπίδαhopeverbἔχοντεςhavingclause · adverbialverbαὐξανομένηςincreasingnoun phrase · subjectτῆςthenoun phraseπίστεωςfaithὑμῶνof youclause · adverbialclauseprepositional phrase · adverbialἐνamongὑμῖνyouverbμεγαλυνθῆναιto be enlargedprepositional phrase · adverbialκατὰaccording tonoun phraseτὸνthenoun phraseκανόναareaἡμῶνof usprepositional phrase · adverbialεἰςtoπερισσείανabundanceclauseprepositional phrase · adverbialεἰςso asnoun phraseτὰthatprepositional phraseὑπερέκειναbeyondὑμῶνyouverbεὐαγγελίσασθαιto preach the gospelclauseadverbialοὐκnotprepositional phrase · adverbialἐνinnoun phraseἀλλοτρίῳanother’sκανόνιareaprepositional phrase · adverbialεἰςinnoun phraseτὰthingsἕτοιμαreadyverbκαυχήσασθαιto boast

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Non in immensum gloriantes in alienis laboribus : spem autem habentes crescentis fidei vestræ, in vobis magnificari secundum regulam nostram in abundantiam,

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܘܠܐ ܡܫܬܒܗܪܝܢܢ ܠܒܪ ܡܢ ܡܫܘܚܬܢ ܒܥܡܠܐ ܕܐܚܪܢܐ ܐܠܐ ܐܝܬ ܠܢ ܣܒܪܐ ܕܟܕ ܪܒܝܐ ܗܝܡܢܘܬܟܘܢ ܒܟܘܢ ܢܬܪܘܪܒ ܐܝܟ ܡܫܘܚܬܢ ܘܢܬܝܬܪ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

οὐκ εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα καυχώμενοι ἐν ἀλλοτρίοις κόποις, ἐλπίδα δὲ ἔχοντες αὐξανομένης τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν μεγαλυνθῆναι κατὰ τὸν κανόνα ἡμῶν εἰς περισσείαν,

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

οὐκ εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα καυχώμενοι ἐν ἀλλοτρίοις κόποις, ἐλπίδα δὲ ἔχοντες αὐξανομένης τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν μεγαλυνθῆναι κατὰ τὸν κανόνα ἡμῶν εἰς περισσείαν,

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

οὐκ εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα καυχώμενοι ἐν ἀλλοτρίοις κόποις, ἐλπίδα δὲ ἔχοντες αὐξανομένης τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν μεγαλυνθῆναι κατὰ τὸν κανόνα ἡμῶν εἰς περισσείαν,

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

οὐκ εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα καυχώμενοι ἐν ἀλλοτρίοις κόποις, ἐλπίδα δὲ ἔχοντες αὐξανομένης τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν μεγαλυνθῆναι κατὰ τὸν κανόνα ἡμῶν εἰς περισσείαν,

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

οὐκ εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα καυχώμενοι ἐν ἀλλοτρίοις κόποις, ἐλπίδα δὲ ἔχοντες αὐξανομένης τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν μεγαλυνθῆναι κατὰ τὸν κανόνα ἡμῶν εἰς περισσείαν,

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

οὐκ εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα καυχώμενοι ἐν ἀλλοτρίοις κόποις, ἐλπίδα δὲ ἔχοντες αὐξανομένης τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν μεγαλυνθῆναι κατὰ τὸν κανόνα ἡμῶν εἰς περισσείαν,

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

οὐκ εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα καυχώμενοι ἐν ἀλλοτρίοις κόποις, ἐλπίδα δὲ ἔχοντες αὐξανομένης τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν μεγαλυνθῆναι κατὰ τὸν κανόνα ἡμῶν εἰς περισσείαν,

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

οὐκ εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα καυχώμενοι ἐν ἀλλοτρίοις κόποις, ἐλπίδα δὲ ἔχοντες αὐξανομένης τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν μεγαλυνθῆναι κατὰ τὸν κανόνα ἡμῶν εἰς περισσείαν,

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse all agree
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

Every edition agrees. All 8 printed editions — Nestle-Aland 28, Nestle-Aland 27, SBLGNT, Westcott-Hort, Tregelles, Tyndale House 2017, Textus Receptus (KJV), Byzantine majority — carry every word of this verse, in the same order, with no difference that any translator would render differently.


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

2 Corinthians 10:15οὐnotnotοὐεἰςtotoεἰςthe [thingsthe [things]ἄμετροςbeyond measbeyond measureἄμετροςκαυχάομαιboastingboastingκαυχάομαιἐνininἐνἀλλότριοςothers’others’ἀλλότριοςκόποςlabors,labors,κόποςἐλπίςhopehopeἐλπίςδέhoweverhoweverδέἔχωhavinghavingἔχωαὐξάνωincreasingincreasingαὐξάνωthetheπίστιςfaithfaithπίστιςσύof youof youσύἐνamongamongἐνσύyouyouσύμεγαλύνωto be enlarto be enlargedμεγαλύνωκατάaccording taccording toκατάthetheκανώνareaareaκανώνημωνof usof usημωνεἰςtotoεἰςπερισσείαexcess,excess,περισσείαεἰςPrep. intoPrep. into, in,εἰςἄλφαletter theletter the firsἄλφαἐκPrep. fromPrep. from out,ἐκἄλλοςAdj other,Adj other, anotἄλλοςκόπτωv. I cut ov. I cut off, mκόπτωπείθωv. I persuv. I persuade, πείθωμέγαςAdj. & ComAdj. & Comp.advμέγαςπερισσεύωv. I exceev. I exceed, amπερισσεύωμήNeg.prt. nNeg.prt. not, lμήεὔχομαιv. I pray,v. I pray, wishεὔχομαιἹεροσόλυμαn.f. & n.nn.f. & n.n. JerἹεροσόλυμαεἰσέρχομαιv. I go inv. I go in, comεἰσέρχομαισυναγωγήn.f. an asn.f. an assemblσυναγωγήἔρημοςAdj desertAdj deserted, dἔρημοςἀμήνHebr. veriHebr. verily, tἀμήνἔξεστι(ν)v. it is pv. it is permitἔξεστι(ν)μόνοςAdv alone,Adv alone, but,μόνοςσάρξn.f. fleshn.f. flesh, bodσάρξ
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in 2 Corinthians 10:15

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
οὐκou not G3756 Particle · negative
1,622× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This is a strong 'no', used to deny something completely. It appears in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 13:29 and John 1:21. It is a negative answer to a question.
Tyndale gloss
no
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word οὐ (transliterated as ou) is a primary negative particle meaning 'not' or 'no.' It is used to negate verbs or statements, often appearing in various forms depending on the following sound. In the New Testament, it frequently serves to deny facts and is distinct from another negative particle, μή (transliterated as ), which is used for prohibitions or wishes.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Ac 2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., § 409; M, Pr., 44, 244),

[in LXX for לֹא, אַיִן, אֵין;]

neg. particle,

not, no, used generally c. indic. and for a denial of fact (cf . μή);

absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mt 13:29, Jo 1:21 21:5; οὒ οὔ, Mt 5:37, Ja 5:12.

Most freq. negativing a verb or other word, Mt 1:25 10:26, 38, Mk 3:25 9:37, Jo 8:29, Ac 7:5, Ro 1:16, Phl 3:3, al.; in…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

οὐ before a consonant, οὐκ before a vowel with a smooth breathing, and ody before an aspirated vowel ; but sometimes in the best codd. οὐχ occurs even before a smooth breathing; accordingly LT WH mrg. have adopted οὐχ ἰδού, Acts ii. 7; LT οὐχ ᾿Ιουδαϊκῶς, Gal. ii. 14 (see WH. Introd. § 409); L οὐχ ὀλίγος, Acts xix. 23; οὐχ ἠγάπησαν, Rev. xii. 11; and contrariwise οὐκ before an aspirate, as οὐκ ἕστηκεν, Jn. viii. 44 T; [οὐκ ἕνεκεν, 2 Co. vii. 12 T]; (οὐκ εὗρον, Lk. xxiv. 3; [οὐκ ὑπάρχει, Acts iii. 6] in cod. x [alsoC*; ef. cod. Alex. in 1 ἔβαν. iv. 2,12; Job xix. 16; xxxviiil. 11, 26]); cf. W. $5, 14d. 14; Β. τ; [A. v. Schiitz, Hist. Alphab. Att., Berol. 1875, pp: 54-58 ; Sophocles, Hist. of Grk. Alphab., 1st ed. 1848, p- 64 sq. (on the breathing); Tdf Sept., ed. 4, Proleg. pp: Xxxiii. xxxiv.; Scrivener, Collation ete., 2d ed., p. lv. no. 9; id. cod. Bezae p. xlvii. no. 11 (ef. p. xlii.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ου to make the voyage” (Edd.), and P Amh II. 78?! (a.p. 184) τοιαύτης ο[ὖ]ν αὐθαδίας ἐν αὐτῷ οὔσης οὐ δυνάμενος [ἐν]καρτερεῖν ἐπιδίδωμι, ‘“ his audacity having reached this pitch I can endure no longer and present this petition.” See further Proleg. p. 231 f. In support of the translation ‘‘ I determined not to know” in 1 Cor 2, we may cite P Par 2657 (B.c. 163) (= UPZi. Ρ-. 248) οὐκ ἐκρίναμεν καταχωρῆσαι, ‘we determined not to record,” P Tebt I. 124° (c. B.c. 118) οὐκ (ἐκδρίναμεν ἐξαρ[ιθ]μεῖ[σθαι, “we determined not to be counted,” and the classical formula in P Hamb I. 27° (B.c. 250 (249)) οὐκ ἔφη εἰδέναι, ‘he said that he did not know.” The origin of the double negative οὐ μή is fully discussed by Moulton Pro/eg. p. 187 ff. When we pass to its actual occurrences in the NT, we find that these for the most part are found in passages derived from the OT and in the Sayings of our Lord…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

οὐ (ou) — no.

οὐ,

the negative of fact and statement, as μή of will and thought; οὐ denies, μή rejects; οὐ is absolute, μή relative; οὐ objective, μή subjective. —The same differences hold for all compounds of οὐ and μή, and some examples of οὐδέ and οὐδείς are included below.—As to the Form, see infr. G. USAG[Refs 5th c.BC+]

I. as the negative of single words,

II. as the negative of the sentence.

I. οὐ adhering to single words so as to form a quasi-compound with them:—with Verbs: οὐ δίδωμι withhold, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐκ εἰῶ prevent, [Refs]; οὐκ ἐθέλω refuse, [Refs]; οὔ φημι deny, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but sometimes οὐ is retained, εἰ δ᾽ ἂν.. οὐκ ἐθέλωσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐάντε.. οὐ (variant{μή}) φῆτε ἐάντε φῆτε [Refs 8th c.BC+] —On the use of οὐ in contrasts, see below [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

οὐ

ou

ouk ook, and (before an aspirate)

ouch ookh

a primary word; the absolute negative (compare 3361) adverb; no or

not:--+ long, nay, neither, never, no (X man), none, (can-)not, +

nothing, + special, un(-worthy), when, + without, + yet but. See also

3364, 3372.

see GREEK for 3361

see GREEK for 3364

see GREEK for 3372

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

οὐ

Neg.prt.

no, not

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

οὐ ou 1x

negative adverb, originally the gen. of ὅς, spelled οὐκ if followed by a word beginning with a vowel and a smooth breathing, οὐχ if followed by a vowel and rough breathing, not, no, Mt. 5:37; 12:43; 23:37; for the peculiarities of its usage (especially as distinct from μή) consult a grammar

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Particle-N — Particle · negative
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
82%not
not82% · 1383×certainly6% · 96×surely4% · 70×no longer3% · 50×no2% · 39×other renderings3% · 51×

1,689 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 17 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial82%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,622 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
εἰμίI am, existἐγώαὐτός
ὅς
ἐγώθερίζωI reap, gatherδέbut, on the othe
ὅτιthat, since, because
σύαὐτόςἐγώ
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἐνἐπί
σύ
λέγωI say, speakγάρforὅς
οὐnot1622×
what comes after →
εἰμίI am, exist
ἐκArticle theἐγώ
μήNeg
παρέρχομαιI pass byεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inπίνωI drink, imbibe
οἶδαI know, remember
ὅτιthat, since, becArticle theτίςIrg
γάρfor
εἰμίI am, existθέλωI will, wish, deArticle the
δύναμαιI am powerful, am ab
ἔρχομαιI come, goσῴζωI save, healArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceοὐ · 1,622× in the New Testament
John Matthew Luke 1 Corinthians Romans Mark Acts 2 Corinthians Revelation Hebrews 1 John Galatians

8 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 6c. AD 40

ὡς γὰρ τῶν κολοσσιαίων μεγεθῶν τὰς ἐμφάσεις καὶ ἡ βραχυτάτη σφραγὶς τυπωθεῖσα δέχεται, οὕτως τάχα που καὶ τὰ τῆς ἀναγραφείσης ἐν τοῖς νόμοις κοσμοποιίας ὑπερβάλλοντα κάλλη καὶ ταῖς μαρμαρυγαῖς τὰς τῶν ἐντυγχανόντων ψυχὰς ἐπισκιάζοντα βραχυτέροις…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.11c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.8c. AD 100

ἐγὼ δὲ οὐχ ὡς διδάσκαλος, ἀλλ̓ ὧς εἰς ἐξ ὑμῶν ὑποδείξω ὀλίγα, δἰ ὧν ἐν τοῖς παροῦσιν εὐφρανθήσεσθε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

δὲ γενόμεναι κατὰ τὸ ἀναγκαῖον κληρονομήσασαι ταξάμεναι τὰ καθήκοντα τέλη θεᾶι Βερενίκηι κυριεύομεν. ὅθεν οὐκ ἀποδιδόντων τὰ ἡμέτερα ἐπεδώκαμεν ἐν τῶι λ ἔτει προσανγελίαν Ἡρακλείδει γενομένωι ἀρχιφυλακίτηι τοῦ Παθυρίτου

C.Erbstreit16Diospolis Magna (Theben)135 BC

ι ἀρουρῶν πρόκτησιν … ένου αὐτὸν ἐν συνεδρίωι καὶ συγχώρησιν … ειν, ἐν ἧι οὐκ εὐδοκεῖ ὁ πατήρ. ὅθεν καταβεβραβευμένοι … ήρου συνεριου ἀξιοῦμεν, ἐὰν φαίνηται, συντάξαι γράψαι, οἷς

P.Adl. 2Pathyris125 BC

ὠνῆς ἐν πίστει διὰ τῶν περὶ τὸν Πανεβχοῦνιν ἐκτελειωθεῖσαν τῶι … ἔτει ἀντὶ ὀφειλημάτων, οὐκ ἐπελευσομένους τὸν Πανερέα καὶ τὴν Σενενοῦπιν περὶ ὀφειλημάτων μηδὲ περὶ ἄλλου μηδενός. ταῦτα δὲ

not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
εἰςeis to G1519 Preposition
1,766× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in 2 Corinthians as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means toward or into, indicating direction or purpose, as seen in Matthew 8:23 and Mark 1:45. It can also imply a sense of movement or action. The KJV translates it in various ways.
Tyndale gloss
toward
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰς is a preposition meaning 'into' or 'to,' used with the accusative case. It indicates direction, entrance, or limit, applicable to place, time, and figurative purposes. The New Testament frequently employs it to express movement toward locations or states, as seen in passages like Matthew 8:23. It can also denote relationships or results, such as 'for' or 'among.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰς,

prep. c. acc.,

expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, c. acc.).

Of place.

After verbs of motion;

of entrance into: Mt 8:23 9:7, Mk 1:45, Lk 2:15 8:31, al.;

of approach, to or towards: Mk 11:1, Lk 6:8 19:28, Jo 11:31 21:6, al.;

before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mk 4:7 8:19, 20, Lk 11:49, Jo 21:23, al.;

Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mt 8:18, 21:1, Mk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰς (eis) — toward.

ἐν εἰς

or ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is found in nearly all early Ionic dialect Inscrr. (except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and usually in Attic dialect Prose (except [Refs 5th c.BC+] is used before vowels for the sake of meter; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω), ἐς μακαρίαν. Aeolic dialect poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in Aeolic dialect εἰς, but spurious in Attic dialect-Ionic dialect) Radical sense into, and then more loosely, to:

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰς

eis

a primary preposition; to or into (indicating the point reached or

entered), of place, time, or (figuratively) purpose (result, etc.);

also in adverbial phrases:--(abundant-)ly, against, among, as, at,

(back-)ward, before, by, concerning, + continual, + far more

exceeding, for (intent, purpose), fore,

+ forth, in (among, at, unto, -so much that, -to), to the

intent that, + of one mind, + never, of, (up-)on, + perish, + set at

one again, (so) that, therefore(-unto), throughout, til, to (be, the

end, -ward), (here-)until(-to), ...ward, (where-)fore, with. Often

used in composition with the same general import, but only with verbs

(etc.) expressing motion (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰς

Prep.

into, in, among, till, for

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰς

into, to c. acc.

PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY. Radical sense, into, and then to:

OF PLACE, the commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Hom., etc.:—properly opposed to ἐκ, ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης from head to foot, Il.; εἰς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theocr.:—then, with all Verbs implying motion or direction, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, id. Il.:—in Hom. and Hdt. also c. acc. pers., where the attic use ὡς, πρός, παρά.

with Verbs which express rest in a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκε, i. e. he brought it into the house, and put it there, Od.; παρεῖναι ἐς τόπον to go to a place and be there, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%into
into33% · 595×to32% · 570×for10% · 185×in9% · 160×unto4% · 69×toward2% · 44×other renderings8% · 145×other renderings2% · 29×

1,797 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial95%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,766 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
βάλλωI cast, throw, rεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inδέbut, on the othe
εἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in, en
καίand, even, also,μήNegαὐτός
ἔρχομαιI come, go
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςοὗτος
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἐκκόπτωI cut out, cut oπόλιςa city
ἐγώ
εἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,δίδωμιI offer, give
εἰςto1766×
what comes after →
Article the
αἰώνan age, a cycle οἶκοςa house, househoοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,οὗτος
ἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem
καίand, even, also,εἰςὅτιthat, since, bec
ὅς
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἄνDisj
σύ
καίand, even, also,μήNegἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰς · 1,766× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew John Mark Romans Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Peter 1 Corinthians Ephesians

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι ἧς

BGU 3 999Pathyris100 BC

καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

ος, βορρᾶ γῆ Σχώτου τοῦ Τρύφωνος, ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς γῆς, λιβὸς ἡ φέρουσα εἰς τὸ Κρόνειον ὁδός, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου Πέρσης τῆς

not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
τὰho the [things] G3588 Article · accusative · plural · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in 2 Corinthians as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-APN — Article · accusative · plural · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-APN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the [things]19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
ἄμετραametros beyond measure G280 Adjective · accusative · plural · neuter
2× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for immoderate means something is excessive or without measure, as seen in 2 Corinthians 10. It describes something that is overwhelming or too much to handle.
Amplified meaning
immoderately, excessively
Tyndale gloss
immoderate
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἄμετρος (i.e., *ametros*) means 'without measure' or 'immeasurable.' It can describe something excessive or immoderate, particularly in moral contexts. The New Testament references it in 2 Corinthians 10:13 and 15, where it conveys boasting beyond measure. The word is derived from the negative prefix and the word for measure.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

* ἄμετρος, -ον

(< μέτρον),

without measure: adverbially, εἰς τὰ ἄ., excessively, II Co 10:13 10:15†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἄμετρος, -ov, (μέτρον a measure), without measure, immense: 2 Co. x. 13, 15 sq. (εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα καυχᾶσθαι to boast to an immense extent, i. e. beyond measure, excessively). (Plat., Xen., Anthol. iv. p. 170, and ii. 206, ed. Jacobs. )

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἄμετρος. The form ἀμέτρητος occurs in a touching sepulchral inscription regarding a husband and wife from Khodes /A/de 149 (ii/B.c.): ταὐτὰ λέγοντες ταὐτὰ φρονοῦντες ἤλθομεν τὰν ἀμέτρητον ὁδὸν εἰς “Alday.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἄμετρος (ametros) — immoderate.

ἄμετρος, ον,

without or beyond measure, immense, κακόν[Refs 4th c.BC+]; opposed to μετρητός, [Refs 5th c.BC+]. adverb -τρως[Refs]: neuter plural as adverb, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

2. immoderate, in moral sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+] adverb -τρως[Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. neverceasing, τέττιγες[Refs 4th c.BC+]

4. disproportionate, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: superlative -ότατος most unequal, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. without metre, prosaic, opposed to ἔμμετρος, [Refs 4th c.BC+] adverb -τρως unmetrically, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; not in metre, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

III. ἄμετρος, ={βάτος}, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἄμετρος

ametros

from 1 (as a negative particle) and 3358; immoderate:--(thing) without

measure.

see GREEK for 1

see GREEK for 3358

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἄμετρος, ον

Adj

not measurable, immeasurable

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἄμετρος ametros 2x

without or beyond measure, regardless of measure, 2 Cor. 10:13, 15*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἄμετρος μέτρον without measure, immense, excessive, boundless, Plat.:—adv. ἀμέτρως, id. Plat.; neut. pl. ἄμετρα as adv., Babr.

immoderate, in moral sense, Plat.:—adv. ἀμέτρως, Xen., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-APN — Adjective · accusative · plural · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-APN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Measure

Several words are so rendered in the Authorized Version. (1.) Those which are indefinite. (a) Hok, Isa. 5:14, elsewhere “statute.” (b) Mad, Job 11:9; Jer. 13:25, elsewhere “garment.” (c) Middah, the word most frequently thus translated, Ex. 26:2, 8, etc. (d) Mesurah, Lev. 19:35; 1 Chr. 23:29. (e) Mishpat, Jer. 30:11, elsewhere “judgment.” (f) Mithkoneth and token, Ezek. 45:11. (g) In New Testament metron, the usual Greek word thus rendered (

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

See SHEKELS, TALENT, BATH, or Ephah, EPHAH, etc.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ (The following modern equivalents of ancient measurements are based upon the latest research, and are as correct as is possible at this time)

→ DRY

1. A bushel, about a peck Mt 5:15; Mr 4:21; Lu 11:33

2. A cab, or kab, about two quarts 2Ki 6:25

3. A cor, equal to one homer or ten ephahs, equal to about eleven and one-ninth bushels 1Ki 4:22; 5:11; 2Ch 2:10; 27:5; Ezr 7:22

4. An ephah, equal to three seah, and in liquid, to a bath, containing about a bushel and a half

Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Special Laws 4.79c. AD 40

Πᾶν μὲν πάθος ἐπίληπτον, ἐπεὶ καὶ πᾶσα ἄμετρος καὶ πλεονάζουσα ὁρμὴ καὶ τῆς ψυχῆς ἡ ἄλογος καὶ παρὰ φύσιν κίνησις ὑπαίτιος·

not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
καυχώμενοιkauchaomai boasting G2744 Verb · present · no voice stated · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
37× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To boast or glory in something, as in 1 Corinthians 1:31 and 2 Corinthians 10:13. It can be used in a good or bad sense, like rejoicing or bragging. The KJV translates it as boast or glory.
Amplified meaning
glory in, take pride in
Tyndale gloss
to boast
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word καυχάομαι (transliterated as kauchaomai) means to boast or glory, and it appears in various contexts in the New Testament. It is built from the root related to speaking loudly or boasting, and can convey both positive and negative connotations. The term is used in several New Testament letters, particularly by Paul, to express pride or joy in relation to God or others.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καυχάομαι, -ῶμαι,

[in LXX for הלל hith., etc.;]

to boast or glory (in LXX, of joyous exultation, and so in the NT quotations, infr.; cf. DB, ii, 790b; Hort on Ja 1:9): absol., I Co 1:31(LXX) I Co 4:7 13:3, II Co 10:13, 17(LXX) 11:16, 18 12:1, 6, Eph 2:9, Ja 4:16; c. acc. rei, II Co 9:2 11:30; seq. ἐν (LXX), Ro 2:23 5:3, I Co 3:21, II Co 5:12 10:15 11:12 12:5, 9, Ga 6:13, 14, Ja 1:9; ἐν (τ.) θεῷ…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καυχάομαι, -ὥμαι, 2 pers. sing. καυχᾶσαι (Ro. τ 1.28}; 1 Co. iv. 7; see κατακαυχάομαιλ: ; fut. καυχήσομαι; 1 aor. ἐκαυχησάμην; pf. κεκαύχημαι; (καύχη a boast); [fr. Pind. and Hat. down]; Sept. mostly for 99007; in the N. τὰ often used by Paul [some 35 times; by Jas. twice]; glory (whether with reason or without): absol., 1 Goi i. 31*; iv. 7; xiii. 3 L [ed. ster. WH (see xaiw)];, 2 Co. x. [13], 17°; xi. 16,18; xii. 1, 6,11 Rec.; Eph. ii. 9; Jas. iv. 16; ri (ace. of the thing [cf. W. 222 (209)]), to glory (on account) of a thing: 2 Co. ix. 2 (ἣν καυχῶμαι ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν Maxedéow, which I boast of on your behalf unto the Macedonians [B. § 133, 1]; cf. vii. 14, [and see below 7); 2 Co. xi. 30, (Prov. xxvii.1; Leian. ocyp. 120); foll. by ἐν w. dat. of the obj. [W. § 33 d.; B. § 133, 23], to glory ina thing, (by a usage foreign to class. Grk.; but the Lat. says glorior in aliquo): Ro. ii. 23; v. 3…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

καυχάομαι. The 2nd sing. pres. midd. καυχᾶσαι, as in Rom 217,33. 1 Cor 4? (cf. Sir 67 κτᾶσαι, and see Thackeray Gr. i. p. 218) which has been formed afresh in the Kowwy with the help of the—oat that answers to 3rd sing.—tav in the perf., is paralleled by χαριεῖσαι = χαριεῖ in P Grenf II. 14 (c)? (B.C. 264 or 227): cf. P Oxy 11. 292° (c. a.D. 25) χαρίεσαι δέ μου τὰ μέγιστα, ‘you will confer upon me a very great favour,” and see Proleg. p. 53f., Mayser Gr. p. 328, Radermacher Gr. p. 73, and Wackernagel 74ZZ xxxiii. (1908) p. 639. For the verb cf. P Oxy VIII. 11607*: (iii/iv a.p.) ἔγραψάς por... ὅτι καυχώμενος ἔχ (/. ἔχω) ὄνομα AtoSwpov ὅτι ἔπεμψά σοι ἀργύρια" ἐγὼ γὰρ οὐ καύχομαι (/. καυχῶμαι) ἐμαυτὸν ἔπεμψά σοι, ‘you wrote me that my boastfulness earns me the name of ‘ Gift of Zeus’ because I sent you money; but I do not boast about what I sent you”’ (Ed.), PSI I. 2615 (v/a.p.)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καυχάομαι (kauchaomai) — to boast.

καυχ-άομαι,

Doric dialect καυχέομαι [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 2nd pers. singular καυχᾶσαι in late Gr., as [NT]: future -ήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐκαυχησάμην [Refs 4th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect optative καυχάσαιτο [Refs 7th c.BC+]: perfect κεκαύχημαι [NT]:—active, [Refs]:— speak loud, be loud-tongued, κ. παρὰ καιρόν [Refs 5th c.BC+], cf. Eup.[same place], etc.; boast, vaunt oneself, ἐπ᾽ αἰζηοῖσι κ. μέγα [Refs 5th c.BC+] [same place]; ἔν τινι NT.Rom.[same places]: c.accusative et infinitive, aorist or present, boast that.., [Refs 5th c.BC+] [same place], etc.: with participle, boast of doing or being, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὅτι.. [Refs 1st c.BC+]: with accusative, boast of, [NT+4th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

καυχάομαι

kauchaomai

from some (obsolete) base akin to that of aucheo (to boast) and 2172;

to vaunt (in a good or a bad sense):--(make) boast, glory, joy,

rejoice.

see GREEK for 2172

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καυχάομαι

v.

I boast, glory

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καυχάομαι kauchaomai 37x

to glory, boast, Rom. 2:17, 23; ὑπέρ τινος, to boast of a person or thing, to undertake a complimentary testimony to, 2 Cor. 12:5; to rejoice, exult, Rom. 5:2, 3, 11

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

καυχάομαι καυχάομαι, 2nd sg. καυχᾶσαι in late Gr. akin to αὐχέω, εὔχομαι to speak loud, be loud-tongued, Pind.: to boast or vaunt oneself, c. inf., to boast that, Hdt.:— c. acc. to boast of a thing, c. acc., NTest.

from καύχη

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PNP-NPM — Verb · present · no voice stated · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PNP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: middle or passive depoNent Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

→ General scriptures concerning Pr 20:14; 25:14; 27:1; Isa 10:15; Jer 9:23; Ro 1:30; Jas 3:5; 4:16

→ Of evil Ps 52:1

→ INSTANCES OF

Goliath 1Sa 17

Ben-hadad 1Ki 20:10

Sennacherib 2Ki 18:19; Isa 10:8-15

The disciples Lu 10:17; with 10:20

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
18%boast
boast18% · 7×boasting13% · 5×may boast8% · 3×i will boast8% · 3×you boast5% · 2×he should boast5% · 2×should boast5% · 2×will boast5% · 2×other renderings32% · 12×

38 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 20 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb89%subject8%object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 37 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀλλάbut, exceptνόμοςa law, the MosaiἵστημιI cause to stand
σύ
ὑπέρἐν
τὶς
περισσός& Advμικρόςlittle, smallμήNeg
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐν
ἄμετροςnot measurable, imme
Article the
καυχάομαιboasting37×
what comes after →
ἐν
Article theκύριοςlord, Lord, mastθεόςGod, a god
οὐNeg
καταισχύνωI shame, disgracεἰμίI am, exist
δεῖit is necessary, ine
Article theοὐNeg
εἰCond
μήNeg
διά
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαυχάομαι · 37× in the New Testament
2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans Galatians James 2 Thessalonians Ephesians Philippians
Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 8.372c. AD 75–95

τοῦ δʼ Ἀχάβου μὴ καυχᾶσθαι δεῖν ἀποκριναμένου καθωπλισμένον ἀλλὰ τῇ μάχῃ κρείττω γενόμενον, ἐλθόντες οἱ πρέσβεις καὶ δειπνοῦντα καταλαβόντες τὸν βασιλέα μετὰ τριάκοντα καὶ δύο βασιλέων συμμάχων ἐδήλωσαν αὐτῷ τὴν ἀπόκρισιν·

Ignatius of AntiochThe Letters of Ignatius 5.6.3c. AD 110

εὐχαριστῶ δὲ τῷ θεῷ μου, ὅτι εὐσυνείδητός εἰμι ἐν ὑμῖν καὶ οὐκ ἔχει τις καυχήσασθαι οὔτε λάθρα οὔτε φανερῶς, ὅτι ἐβάρησά τινα ἐν μικρῷ ἢ ἐν μεγάλῳ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD
P.Oxy. 8 1160OxyrhynchosAD 201–AD 400

Ἑλένην καὶ τοὺς ἡμῶν πάντας κατʼ ὄνομα. ἔγραψάς μοι διὰ τῶν σῶν γραμμάτων ὅτι καυχώμενος ωμενος ἐχόμενα Διοδώρου ὅτι ἔπεμψά σοι ἀργύρια· ἐγὼ γὰρ οὐ καυχῶμαι ἐμαυτὸν ἃ ἔπεμψά

not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
ἐνen in G1722 Preposition
2,743× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word is a preposition that means in, on, or among something. It's used in many places, like Matthew 7:3 and Luke 7:37, to describe a location or relationship. It can also mean by, with, or during.
Tyndale gloss
in/on/among
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν,

prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).

Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐν (en) — in/on/among.

ἐν,

poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]

__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.

__A WITH DAT.

__A.I OF PLACE,

__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐν

en

a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or

state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or

constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519

and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +

almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+

all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,

-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,

one, X quickly,

X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),

through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,

with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same

import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate

direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)

preposition.

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐν

Prep.

in, on, among

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐν en 2x

followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐν

e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.

Lat. in.

PREP. WITH DAT.:

OF PLACE

in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.

in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.

in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.

in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.

in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
ἀλλοτρίοιςallotrios others’ G245 Adjective · dative · plural · masculine
14× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Something that is 'another's' refers to something that belongs to someone else, not to oneself, as seen in Luke 16:12 and Romans 14:4. It can also describe something that is foreign or alien, like in Matthew 17:25-26.
Amplified meaning
another's, someone else's
Tyndale gloss
another’s
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀλλότριος (i.e., *allotrios*) is built from the root for 'another' and means belonging to another or foreign. It covers a range of meanings including alien, strange, and hostile, often contrasted with what is one's own. The New Testament uses it in verses like Luke 16:12 and Romans 14:4. Dodson's entry is notably brief, simply defining it as belonging to another person or foreign.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀλλότριος, -α, -ον

(< ἄλλος),

[in LXX for זוּר, נֵכָר, אַחֵר;]

belonging to another, not one's own (opp. to ἴδιος): Lk 16:12, Ro 14:4 15:20 (Field, Notes, 165 f.), II Co 10:15, 16, I Ti 5:22, He 9:25.

foreign, strange, alien (opp. to οἰκεῖος; v. MM, VGT, s.v.): Mt 17:25, 26, Jo 10:5, Ac 7:6, He 11:9, 34.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀλλότριος, -a, τον; 1. belonging to another (opp. to ἴδιος), not one’s own: Heb. ix. 25; Ro. xiv. 4; xv. 20; 2 Co. x. 15 sq.; 1 Tim. v. 22; Jn. x. 5. in neut., Lk. xvi. 12 (opp. to τὸ ὑμέτερον). 2. foreign, strange: yi, Acts vii. 6; Heb. xi. 9; not of one’s own family, alien, Mt. xvii. 25 sq.; an enemy, Heb. xi. 34, (Hom. I. 5, 214; Xen. an. 3, 5, 5).

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀλλότριος. P Oxy VII. 1067 ὁ (a very ungrammatical letter of iii/A.D.), μάθε οὖν ὅτι ἀλλοτρίαν γυναῖκαν (/. ἀλλοτρία γυνή) ἐκληρονόμησεν αὐτόν, ““Κπονν then that a strange woman is made his heir” (Ed.): The adjective is common in the sense of alzenus, “belonging to others”: one or two special applications may be cited. A rescript of Gordian (P Tebt Il. 285°), which Wilcken marks as suffering from translation out of Latin, uses τοὺς ἀλλοτρίους for * outsiders,” as against legitimate children. P Giss I. 6γ15 (ii/a.p.) τὸ yap ἀλλ[ότ]ριον ἐποίησα Ev[. . . seems to imply ‘‘I did what was foreign to me,” but the lost context may change this entirely. 6. 995 (ii/iii Αἰγυπτίων ἀλλότρια ταῦτα ἣν], ἐδρᾶτο δὲ ὅμως. P Tor I. 141-3 (Ptol. Euergetes) προέφερετο ἀλλότριον εἶναι τὸ παρεισαγόμενον ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ. P Oxy II 2829 (4.p. 30-5) ἡ δὲ ἀλλότρια φρονήσασα THs κοινῆς συμβιώϊσεως], “ became dissatisfied…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀλλότριος (allotrios) — another’s.

ἀλλότριος,

Aeolic dialect ἀλλότερρος [Refs], α, ον, (ἄλλος) of or belonging to another, βίοτος, νηῦς, ἄχεα, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; γυνή another man's wife, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἀλλοτρίων χαρίσασθαι to be bountiful of what is another's, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; γναθμοῖσι γελοίων ἀλλοτρίοισιν with faces unlike their own, of a forced, unnatural laugh, [Refs]; ἀ. ὄμμασιν εἷρπον by the help of another's eyes, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐκ ἀ. ἄτην not inflicted by other hands, [Refs]; but ἀ. φόνος murder of a stranger[Refs 5th c.BC+] reap where one has not sown, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀλλοτριωτάτοις τοῖς σώμασιν χρῆσθαι deal with one's body as if it belonged to another, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀλλότρια, contraction τἀλλότρια, what belongs to others, not one's own, τἀ. ἀποστερεῖν, δειπνεῖν, [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀλλότριος

allotrios

from 243; another's, i.e. not one's own; by extension foreign, not

akin, hostile:--alien, (an-)other (man's, men's), strange(-r).

see GREEK for 243

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀλλότριος, ία, ιον

Adj

belonging to another person, foreign

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀλλότριος allotrios 14x

belonging to another, Lk. 16:12; foreign, Acts 7:6; Heb. 11:9; a foreigner, alien, Mt. 17:25

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀλλότριος ἄλλος opp. to ἴδιος, of or belonging to another, Lat. alienus, Hom., etc.; ἀλλ. γυνή another man's wife, Aesch.; γναθμοῖσι γελοίων ἀλλοτρίοισιν, of the suitors, laughed with a face unlike one's own, of a forced, unnatural laugh, Od. (Horace's malis ridere alienis is different); ἀλλ. ὄμμασιν by the help of another's eyes, Soph.; ἀλλοτριωτάτοις τοῖς σώμασιν χρῆσθαι to deal with one's body as if it absolutely belonged to another, Thuc.

opp. to οἰκεῖος, foreign, strange, Lat. peregrinus, Hom.; often with the notion of hostile, Il.

adv., ἀλλοτρίως ἔχειν or διακεῖσθαι πρός τινα to be unfavourably disposed towards one, Lys.: comp. -ιώτερον less favourably, Dem.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-DPM — Adjective · dative · plural · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-DPM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
21%another’s
another’s21% · 3×another14% · 2×strangers14% · 2×strange7% · 1×others’7% · 1×others7% · 1×foreign7% · 1×foreigners7% · 1×other renderings14% · 2×

14 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 10 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial71%object29%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 14 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἀπόἐνοἶδαI know, remember
ἐν
καυχάομαιI boast, gloryοὐNeg
γῆthe earth, soil, lan
ἐν
κρίνωI judge, decide, thi
Article the
ἐπί
μήNeg
ἀλλότριοςothers’14×
what comes after →
φημίI say
αὐτός
πιστόςtrustworthy, faithfu
οὐNeg
δέbut, on the other ha
οὐNeg
Article the
φωνήa sound, noise,
καίand, even, also, nam
δουλόωI enslave

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀλλότριος · 14× in the New Testament
Hebrews 2 Corinthians John Matthew Romans 1 Timothy Acts Luke
Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 79 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 74c. AD 40

τῷ δὴ πάντων πατρὶ θεῷ τὰ μὲν σπουδαῖα δι’ αὑτοῦ μόνου ποιεῖν οἰκειότατον ἦν ἕνεκα τῆς πρὸς αὐτὸν συγγενείας, τὰ δὲ ἀδιάφορα οὐκ ἀλλότριον, ἐπειδὴ καὶ ταῦτα τῆς ἐχθρᾶς αὐτῷ κακίας ἀμοιρεῖ, τὰ δὲ μικτὰ τῇ μὲν οἰκεῖον τῇ δ’ ἀνοίκειον, οἰκεῖον μὲν…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.17c. AD 75–95

Καὶ ὁ μὲν Ἰάκωβος τοιαύτην οὐκ ἀσυνέτως ἐποιήσατο τῆς ὄψεως τὴν κρίσιν, τοὺς δʼ ἀδελφοὺς τοῦ Ἰωσήπου σφόδρα ἐλύπησε τὰ προειρημένα καὶ διετέθησαν ὡς ἐπʼ ἀλλοτρίῳ τινὶ μέλλοντι τὰ σημαινόμενα διὰ τῶν ὀνειράτων ἀγαθὰ ἕξειν, ἀλλʼ οὐκ ἀδελφῷ καὶ ὧν…

Clement of RomeSecond Clement 5.6c. AD 96

τί οὖν ἐστὶν ποιήσαντας ἐπιτυχεῖν αὐτῶν, εἰ μὴ τὸ ὁσίως καὶ δικαίως ἀναστρέφεσθαι καὶ τὰ κοσμικὰ ταῦτα ὡς ἀλλότρια ἡγεῖσθαι καὶ μὴ ἐπιθυμεῖν αὐτῶν;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

ἀποδοῦναι οὐκ ἐποίησαν, οἰόμενοι ὅρκωι ἀποκλύσαντες ἡμᾶς στερέσειν, προφανῶς ἔνοχοι ὄντες φωρᾶι λείας ἐφημμένοι ἀλλοτρίων καὶ ταῦτʼ ὀρφανικῶν. ὑπὲρ ὧν πλεονάκις ἐντετευχυιῶν ὑπερέχων ἡμᾶς ἀπράκτους καθίστησι. καὶ ἐν τῶι

APF 6 (1920), p. 85Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 120–AD 121

ἅπαντες προφέρονται, καὶ αὐτὸ τὸ παιδίον, εἴτε ἦν τῆς Ἀπίας τῆς καὶ Ἡρακλείας εἴτε ἀλλότριον, τελευτῆσαι, τὰ νῦν εἰς διάλυσιν ἀγείοχαν πάντα τὰ κατὰ τὴν ἀμφισβήτησιν καὶ συνχωροῦσιν ἡ

P.Diog. 5ArsinoitesAD 138

Κλήμης καὶ γνωστῆρας οὐετρανοὺς γ … ν, Οὐαλέριον Παῦλον, Ἰούλιον Κρεῖσπον συγχειρογραφοῦντας αὐτῷ μηδενὶ ἀλλοτρίῳ κεχρῆσθαι. καὶ τῆς Φλαουίου Τιτιανοῦ γενομένου ἡγεμόνος σημειώσεως ἐπὶ τοῦ προκειμένου ὀνόματος Λουκρητίου Κλήμεντος

not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
κόποις,kopos labors, G2873 Noun · dative · plural · masculine
18× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Labor or toil that is physically or emotionally exhausting, such as in John 4:38 and 1 Corinthians 3:8.
Amplified meaning
work, toil
Tyndale gloss
labor
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

κόπος (kopos) refers to labor, toil, and trouble, often implying fatigue or weariness. It is derived from the verb meaning 'to strike' and encompasses a range of meanings from physical labor to emotional distress. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as the labor of love (1 Thessalonians 1:3) and the efforts of teaching (John 4:38). Different lexicons highlight nuances in its use, particularly in distinguishing it from similar terms like μόχθος.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κόπος, -ου, ὁ

(< κόπτω),

[in LXX chiefly for עָמָל, also for אָוֶן, etc.;]

a striking, beating (in Je 51:33 (45:3) = κοπετός).

laborious toil, trouble: Jo 4:38, I Co 3:8 15:58, I Th 3:5; κ. τ. ἀγάπης, I Th 1:3; ἔργα καὶ κ., Re 2:2; κ. καὶ μόχθος, II Co 11:27, I Th 2:9, II Th 3:8; pl., ἐν κ., II Co 6:5 10:15 11:23; ἐκ τ. κ., Re 14:13; κόπους (-ον) παρέχειν (in cl. more freq. π. πράγματα…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κόπος, -ου, 6, (κόπτω) ; 1. i. 4: τὸ κόπτειν, a beating. 2. i. 4. κοπετός, a beating of the breast in grief, sorrow, (Jer. li. 33 (xlv. 3)). 3. labor (so Sept. often for })» ἘΜῸΝ a. trouble (Aeschyl., Soph.) : κόπους παρέχειν τινί, to cause one trouble, make work for him, Mt. xxvi. 10; Mk. xiv. 6; Lk. xi. 7; Gal. vi. 17; κόπον παρέχ. τινί, Lk. xviii. 5. ὍὌ. intense labor united with trouble, toil, (Eur., Arstph., al.) : univ., plur., 2 Co. vi. 5; xi. 23; of manual labor, joined with μόχθος [(see below) ], 1 Th. ii. 9; ἐν κόπῳ Kk. μόχθῳ, [toil and travail], 2 Co. xi. 27 (where L T Tr WH om. ev); 2 Th. iii. 8; of the laborious euurts of Christian virtue, 1 Co. xv. 58; Rev. ii. 2; plur. Rev. xiv. 13; 6 κόπος τῆς ἀγάπης, the labor to which love prompts, and which voluntarily assumes and endures trouble and pains for the salvation of others, 1 Th. i. 3; Heb. vi. 10 Rec.; of toil in teaching…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κόπος (kopos) — labor.

κόπ-ος, ὁ,

(κόπτω) striking, beating, ὀξύχειρι σὺν κόπῳ (Pauw for κτύπῳ) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; στέρνων κόπους (Seidler for κτύπους) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ={κοπανισμός}, [Refs 5th c.AD+]

II. toil and trouble, suffering, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; pain of a disease, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κόπους παρέχειν τινί to give trouble, [NT+2nd c.BC+]; κόπον ἔχειν [Refs 1st c.BC+]

II.2. fatigue, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κόπου ὕπο from very weariness, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κόπῳ δαμέντες, ἁλίσκεσθαι, [NT+5th c.BC+]; περὶ κόπων title of work by [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II.3. work, exertion, καμάραν ἀφ᾽ ἱδίων κόπων ἐποίησεν [Refs 1st c.AD+]; κόπῳ κόπον λύειν proverbial in [Refs 4th c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

κόπος

kopos

from 2875; a cut, i.e. (by analogy) toil (as reducing the strength),

literally or figuratively; by implication, pains:--labour, + trouble,

weariness.

see GREEK for 2875

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κόπος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

trouble, toil, labor

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κόπος kopos 18x

trouble, difficulty, uneasiness, Mt. 26:10; Mk. 14:6; labor, wearisome labor, travail, toil, 1 Cor. 3:8; 15:58; meton. the fruit or consequence of labor, Jn. 4:38; 2 Cor. 10:15

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

κόπος κόπος, ου, κόπτω a striking, beating, Aesch., Eur.

toil, trouble, suffering, Aesch., Soph.

weariness, fatigue, Eur., Ar.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DPM — Noun · dative · plural · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
47%labor
labor47% · 9×labors21% · 4×trouble21% · 4×toil5% · 1×troubles5% · 1×

19 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object44%adverbial39%subject11%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 18 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,εἰςὅτιthat, since, bec
ἐν
ἀκαταστασίαdisturbance, uphἐγώἀλλάbut, except
ἐγώ
μήNegπαρέχωI offer, provide
τίςIrg
αὐτός
αὐτός
τίςIrg
κόποςlabors,18×
what comes after →
παρέχωI offer, provide
Article theκαλόςbeautiful, good,ἤδηnow, already
καίand, even, also, nam
μόχθοςwearisome labor,Article the
ἐγώ
μηδείςno one, nothingκαίand, even, also,
Article the
χῆροςa widowἀγάπηlove
αὐτός
εἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκόπος · 18× in the New Testament
2 Corinthians 1 Thessalonians 1 Corinthians Luke Revelation 2 Thessalonians Galatians John Matthew Mark
Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 17 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Special Laws 2.39c. AD 40

ὧν καὶ ἡ ἄνευ κόπου ψιλὴ διήγησις ἱκανὴ τοὺς μὲν εὐφυεῖς τελειῶσαι πρὸς ἀρετήν, τοὺς δ’ ἀφηνιαστὰς καὶ σκληροὺς τὸ ἦθος εὐπειθεστέρους ἀπεργάσασθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.336c. AD 75–95

καὶ ὁ Ἡσαῦς ἀσπασάμενος αὐτὸν ἀνήρετο τῶν παίδων τὸν ὄχλον καὶ τὰς γυναῖκας, ἠξίου τε τότε μαθὼν περὶ αὐτῶν τὸ πᾶν καὶ αὐτὸς συμβαδίζειν αὐτοῖς πρὸς τὸν πατέρα, Ἰακώβου δὲ προφασιζομένου τὸν κόπον τῶν ὑποζυγίων ὑπεχώρησεν εἰς Σάειραν·

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 3.3.2c. AD 140

καὶ μηκέτι μοι κόπους πάρεχε περὶ ἀποκαλύψεως: αἱ γὰρ ἀποκαλύψεις αὗται τέλος ἔχουσιν: πεπληρωμέναι γάρ εἰσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Mich. 12 656Philadelphia? (Arsinoites)AD 1–AD 50

τοὺς ἄρχοντας καὶ ὑποδεῖξαι αὐτοῖς ὅτι Παπεῖ χάριν τοῦ ἀρχιμαχαιροφόρου ἀνάστατόν με ποιεῖ ἐφόδοις κοπῶν με. διʼ ἃ δεῖ αὐτοὺς τῶι στρατηγῶι μνησθῆναι. οὐδὲν ὀφείλω οὔτε ἔκθεσιν οὔτε ὑποκείμενον.

Doc.Eser.Rom. 103AD 63–AD 64

γράψατε δὲ εἰς πιττάκια, ποῦ ἕκαστος ὑμῶν ἐπιμένει, καὶ γράψω τοῖς στρατηγοῖς, ἵνα μηδεὶς κόπους παράσχῃ. τῆι δ τοῦ Σεβαστοῦ μηνὸς ἐπιδεδώκαμεν αὐτῷ τὰ πιττάκια ἐν τοῖς πριγκιππίοις καὶ

BIFAO 41 (1941), p. 182-183 no. 28Wâdi FawâkhirAD 1–AD 200

παρέχῃ Ἰσχυρᾶς αἰτῶ σε χαλκὸν μὴ αὐτῷ δὸς μηδὲ ἕν . ἂν δέ σοι κόπους παρέχῃ, πλείω τῶν δέκα στατήρων ὧν σοι δέδωκε κατὰ χεῖρας μὴ δὸς … εδυ

not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
ἐλπίδαelpis hope G1680 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
53× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Hope or expectation, as in 2 Corinthians 1:6 and Acts 16:19, where it refers to trusting in God's goodness.
Amplified meaning
have expectation, trust
Tyndale gloss
hope
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐλπίς (lemma: elpis) means hope or expectation, primarily in a positive sense. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often referring to religious hope, such as the hope of salvation or the Messianic hope of Israel. Notably, it can denote both the object of hope and the source of hope, as seen in various verses like Romans 5:4 and Acts 24:15.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐλπίς

(ἑλ-, Ro 8:20, WH, v. Bl., § 4, 3; M, Pr., 44), -ίδος, ἡ

[in LXX for בָּטַח and its derivatives, תִּקְוָה (freq. in Jb), etc. ;]

expectation (in cl., rarely of evil, mostly of good, and so always in NT), hope;

of hope in general: II Co 1:6; c. gen. obj., Ac 16:19; art. inf., Ac 27:20, I Co 9:10; παρ’ ἐλπίδα, Ro 4:18; ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι, I Co 9:10.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐλπίς [sometimes written ἑλπίς ἢ so WH in Ro. viii. 20; Tdf.in Acts ii. 26; see (in 2 below, and) the reff. s. V. ἀφεῖδον], -ἰδος, ἡ, (ἔλπω to make to hope), Sept. for nua and m3, trust; TOM that in which one confides or to which he flees for refuge; MpA expectation, hope; in the classics a vox media, i. e. expectation whether of good or of ill; 1. rarely in a bad sense, expectation of evil, fear; as, τῶν κακῶν ἐλπίς. Leian. Tyrannic. ec. 3; τοῦ φόβου ἐλπίς, Thuc. 7, 61; κακὴ ἐλπίς. Plat. rep. 1 p. 330 e. [ef. legg. 1 p. 644 c. fin.]; πονηρὰ edz. Is. XXvili. 19 Sept. 2. much more freq. in the classics, and always in the N. T., in a good sense: expectation of good, hope; and in the Christian sense, joyful and confident expectation of eternal salvation: Acts xxiii. 63 xxvi. 7; Ro. v. 4.Βη.; xii. 12; xv. 13; 1 Co. xiii. 185; 1 Pet. i. 3; iii. 15; ἀγαθὴ ἐλπίς (often in prof. auth., as Plat.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐλπίς “Ελληνιστί. P Giss I. 365 (B.c. 161) ἀ(ντίγραφον) [συγχωρήσεως Alyurr]([as με]θη[ρ]μην[εὐ]μένης “Ἑλληνιστὶ κατὰ τὸ δυνατόν, P Tor I. 1%4 (B.c. 117) ἀντίγραφα συγγραφῶν Αἰγυπτίων διηρμηνευμένων δ᾽ λληνιστί. For this form of the word see Mayser Gr. p. 457, and for the elliptical usage in Ac 2137 see Field Notes, p. 135 f. élhoyaw (—éw). To Lightfoot’s examples of this word from the inscriptions in his note on Philem?8 τοῦτο ἐμοὶ ἐλλόγα, may now be added several occurrences in the papyri in its general Hellenistic form ἐλλογέω. Thus the technical sense of ‘‘set to one’s account,”’ as in the Philemon passage, comes out well in P Ryl II. 243" (ii/a.b.) where two women write to their steward—8oa ποτὲ οὖν ἐὰν ἀναναλώσῃς (1. ἀναλώσῃΞς) ts τὴν τοῦ κλήρου κατεργασίαν, ἡμεῖν ἐνλόγησον ἐπὶ λόγου, “put down to our account everything you expend on the cultivation of the holding ” (Edd.), and in…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐλπίς (elpis) — hope.

ἐλπ-ίς, ίδος, ἡ,

(see. ἔλπω) hope, expectation (δόξα μελλόντων [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πολλῶν ῥαγεισῶν ἐλπίδων after the wreck of many hopes, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; expectancy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —Constr., in _Attic dialect_, with _genitive_ both of subject and object, as (where both are conjoined) Πελοποννησίων τὴν ἐλπίδα τοῦ ναυτικοῦ the hope of the P.in their navy, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑμέτεραι ἐλπίδες,= ἐς ὑμᾶς, [Refs]; ἐλπίδ᾽ ἔχω, ={ἐλπίζω}, with future infinitive, μὴ οὐ δώσειν δίκην [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with aorist infinitive, κλέος εὑρέσθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+] and future infinitive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ἐλπίδι εἰμί, with future infinitive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐλπίς [ἐστί] μοι with accusative and future infinitive or aorist, ἐλπίς τις αὐτὸν ἥξειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with present infinitive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐλπίδας μεγάλας ἔν τινι ἔχειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; τίν᾽…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐλπίς

elpis

from a primary elpo (to anticipate, usually with pleasure);

expectation (abstractly or concretely) or confidence:--faith, hope.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐλπίς, ίδος, ἡ

n.f.

hope, expectation

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐλπίς elpis 53x

pr. expectation; hope, Acts 24:15; Rom. 5:4; meton. the object of hope, thing hoped for, Rom. 8:24; Gal. 5:5; the author or source of hope, Col. 1:27; 1 Tim. 1:1; trust, confidence, 1 Pet. 1:21; ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι, in security, with a guarantee, Acts 2:26; Rom. 8:20

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐλπίς ἔλπω hope, expectation, Od.;in pl., πολλῶν ῥαγεισῶν ἐλπίδων after the wreck of many hopes, Aesch.;—with gen. both of subject and object, Πελοποννησίων τὴν ἐλπίδα τοῦ ναυτικοῦ the hope of the P. in their navy, Thuc.

the object of hope, a hope, Ὀρέστης, ἐλπὶς δόμων Aesch.

apprehension, fear, id. Aesch.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

hop:

1. In the Old Testament:

In the Revised Version (British and American) the New Testament "hope" represents the noun elpis (52 t), and the verb elpizo (31 t). King James Version, however, renders the noun in Heb 10:23 by "faith," and for the verb gives "trust" in 18 cases (apparently without much system, e.g. in Php 2 compare 2:19 and 23; see TRUST), while in Lu 6:35 it translates apelpizo, by "hoping for nothing again" (the Revised Version (British and American) "never despairing"). But in the Old Testament there is no Hebrew word that has the exact force of "expectation of some good thing," so that in the King James Version "hope" (noun and vb.) stands for some 15 Hebrew words, nearly all of which in other places are given other translation (e.g. mibhTach, is rendered "hope"…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Hope

One of the three main elements of Christian character (1 Cor. 13:13). It is joined to faith and love, and is opposed to seeing or possessing (Rom. 8:24; 1 John 3:2). “Hope is an essential and fundamental element of Christian life, so essential indeed, that, like faith and love, it can itself designate the essence of Christianity (1 Pet. 3:15; Heb. 10:23). In it the whole glory of the Christian vocation is centred (Eph. 1:18; 4:4).” Unbelievers are without this hope (Eph. 2:12;

→ General scriptures concerning Ps 9:18; 16:9; 31:24; 33:18,22; 38:15; 39:7; 43:5; 71:5,14; 78:5-7; 119:74,81,116,166; 130:7; 146:5; Pr 10:28; 13:12; 14:32; 23:18; 24:14; Isa 38:18; Jer 17:7; La 3:21,24,26; Ho 2:15; Joe 3:16; Zec 9:12; Ac 23:6; 24:14,15; 26:7,8; 28:20; Ro 4:18; 5:2-5; 8:24,25; 12:12; 15:4,13;

- In God

Ps 39:7; 1Pe 1:21

- In Christ

1Co 15:19; 1Ti 1:1

- In God's promises

Ac 26:6,7; Tit 1:2

- In the mercy of God

Ps 33:18

- Is the work of the Holy Spirit

Ro 15:13; Ga 5:5

- OBTAINED THROUGH

. Grace

2Th 2:16

. The word

Ps 119:81

. Patience and comfort of the Scriptures

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%hope
hope100% · 53×

53 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial42%object30%subject21%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 53 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oγάρforγραφήa writing, passa
ἐπί
κατασκηνόωI encamp, tabernνῦνnow, already, atἐλπίςhope, expectatio
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀποκαραδοκίαeager expectatioαἰώνιοςeternal, unendinσύ
πίστιςfaith, belief, trust
μένωI remain, abideἐκ
περί
Φαρισαῖοςa Pharisee
ἐλπίςhope53×
what comes after →
Article the
δόξαhonor, renown, gκλῆσιςa calling, summoἐργασίαworking, activit
ἐγώ
βέβαιοςfirm, steadfast,ὅτιthat, since, bec
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀνάστασιςa rising again, ἐπιφάνειαappearing, manif
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
εἰς
δέbut, on the other ha
βλέπωI look, seeἔχωI have, hold, po

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐλπίς · 53× in the New Testament
Romans Acts Hebrews 1 Thessalonians 1 Corinthians 1 Peter 2 Corinthians Colossians Ephesians Titus 1 John 1 Timothy
Across the New Testament15 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 55 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 155c. AD 40

ὡς δὲ εἶδε ῥέπουσαν μὲν ἐπὶ πανουργίαν, εὐσεβείας δὲ καὶ ὁσιότητος ὀλιγωροῦσαν, ἐξ ὧν ἡ ἀθάνατος ζωὴ περιγίνεται, προὐβάλετο κατὰ τὸ εἰκὸς καὶ ἐφυγάδευσεν ἐκ τοῦ παραδείσου, μηδ’ ἐλπίδα τῆς εἰσαῦθις ἐπανόδου δυσίατα καὶ ἀθεράπευτα πλημμελούσῃ ψυχῇ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.90c. AD 75–95

ἔπειτα τῆς λάρνακος περὶ ἄκραν τινὰ ὄρους σταθείσης κατὰ τὴν Ἀρμενίαν συνεὶς ὁ Νῶχος ἀνοίγει τʼ αὐτὴν καὶ θεασάμενος γῆν βραχεῖαν περὶ αὐτὴν ἐπὶ χρηστοτέρας ἤδη γεγονὼς ἐλπίδος ἠρέμει.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Bad. 2 35Ptolemais Hermeiu (Thinites)AD 87

Περιφεράγαθος μὴ ἀμελήσῃ, ἐὰν δύνηται, ἡμῖν ἐνέγκαι καὶ υἱὸν καὶ γλ … … γίγνωσκε ἐλπίδα ἀνευρετικὸν ποιεῖν. ἔρχου σὺν Ταήσι ἀστομάχητος, ἐὰν ἀνέλθῃ. μὴ ἀμελήσῃς τὰ ἄλλα …να μοι

P.Oxy. 50 3555OxyrhynchosAD 1–AD 200

πόλεως. θεραπαινίδιόν μου οἰκογενές, οὗ ἔστιν ὄνομα Πεῖνα, ἠγάπησα καὶ ἐτημέλησα ὡς θυγάτριον ἐπʼ ἐλπίδι τοῦ ἡλικίας γενόμενον ἔχειν με γηροβοσκόν, γυναῖκα ἀβοήθητον οὖσαν καὶ μόνην. τοῦτο δὲ διάγον

P.Oxy. 18 2190OxyrhynchosAD 100

γάρ, ἐπιζητῶν φιλόλογον, καὶ Χαιρήμονα τὸν καθηγητὴν καὶ Δίδυμον τὸν τοῦ Ἀριστοκλέους, παρʼ οἷς ἐλπὶς ἦν καὶ ἐμέ τι κατορθῶσαι, οὐκέτι ἐν τῆι πόλει εὗρον, ἀλλὰ καθάρματα, παρʼ οἷς

not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
δὲde however G1161 Conjunction
2,787× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in 2 Corinthians as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This is a conjunction that means and, but, or then, used to connect ideas like in Matthew 1:2 and 2 Corinthians 6:15.
Tyndale gloss
then
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),

post-positive conjunctive particle;

copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δέ (de) — then.

δέ,

but: adversative and copulative Particle,

I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. without preceding μέν,

II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. copulative,

II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δέ

de

a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,

etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δέ

Cj.

but, on the other hand, and

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δέ de 2x

a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.

δέ is often redundant,

to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.

to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.

POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%now
now33% · 974×however27% · 780×then21% · 620×and12% · 360×but5% · 154×other renderings2% · 49×

2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existσύ
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπεντακισχίλιοιfive thousand
εἰCond
παλαιόςold, ancient, woσύεἰμίI am, exist
εἰμίI am, exist
περιπατέωI walk, conduct ἀναπίπτωI lie down, reclμνημεῖονa tomb, sepulche
οὗτος
δίδωμιI offer, giveθεόςGod, a godπίστιςfaith, belief, t
δέhowever2787×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusθεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐπί
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theσύ
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὗτοςἸωάννηςJohn
τὶς
Article theαὐτόςὄνομαname, character,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδέ · 2,787× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John Mark Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians James 1 Timothy

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
ἔχοντεςechō having G2192 Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
709× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in 2 Corinthians as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means to have or hold something, like a possession or ability. It is used in many ways, such as having power or being with someone. The Bible uses it in Revelation 5:8 and 14:6.
Tyndale gloss
to have/be
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἔχω, transliterated as echō, means 'to have' or 'to hold' and is used in various contexts, including possession, ability, and condition. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often relating to physical possession or metaphorical concepts like keeping faith or emotions. Notably, it can also refer to being pregnant, as seen in Matthew 1:18. The entries do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἔχω,

[in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), בַּעַל, יֵשׁ, etc., 59 words in all;]

(on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, v. M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183),

to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions.

Trans.;

to have, hold, hold fast, etc.;

to hold, as, in the hand: Re 5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Re 1:16 10:2, al.;

of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mt 3:4 22:12, al.; so freq. pres. ptcp. (LS, s.v., A, I, 6; Bl., § 74, 2), Mk 11:13, Jo 18:10, Re 9:17, al.;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἔχω ; fut. ἕξω ; impf. εἶχον, [1 pers. plur. εἴχαμεν, 2 Jn. ἔχω 266 5 T Tr WH], 8 pers. plur. εἶχαν (Mk. viii. 7 L T Tr WH; Rey. ix. 8 LT Tr WH; but ef. [ Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 38; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 165]; B. 40 (35)) and εἴχοσαν (LT Tr WH in Jn. xv. 22, 24; but ef. Bitm. in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. 1858, pp. 485 sqq. 491; see his N. T. Gr. p. 43 (37); [Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 39; Τὰ Proleg. p. 124; WH. App. p. 165; ef. δολεόω ]) ; pres. mid. ptep. ἐχόμενος ; to have,—with 2 aor. act. ἔσχον; pf. ἔσχηκα; I. Transitively. have (hold) in the hand: τὶ ἐν τῇ χειρί, Rev. i. 16; vi. 5; x. 2; xvii. 4; and simply, Rev. v. 8; viii. 3, 6; xiv. 6, ete.; Heb. viii. 3. Ὁ. in the sense of wearing (Lat. gestare) ; of garments, arms and the like: τὸ ἔνδυμα, Mt. iii. 4; xxii. 12; κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων, sc. τί, having a covering hanging down from the head, i.e. having the head covered [B. $130, 5; W. §…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἔχω. It may be well to illustrate some of the less usual forms of this common verb. The future σχήσω (cf. Kithner-Blass Gr. 1. ii. p. 112 n.8) is restored by the editor in OGZS 751° (ii/ B.C.) ἐπεὶ θλιβέντες ἐμ πλείοσιν ἀσθενῶς [σχή]σετε. For the 2 aor. with 1 aor. termination (cf. Ac 757 D συνἐσχαν) see BGU 11. 4518 (i/ii A.D.) ἀναγκαίως ἔσχαμεν δ[ι7᾽ ἐπιστολῆς σε ἀσπάσεσθαι, and for ἔσχοσαν cf. OG/S 315°" (B.C. 164-159) ὑφοψίαν μοχθηράν, ἣν Kal περὶ Tod ἀδελφοῦ ἔσχοσαν. In 20. 2237 (iii/B.c.) we have αὐτοὶ ἀπολογισάμενοι περί τε τῆς εὐνοίας ἣν διὰ παντὸς εἰσχήκατε εἰς τὴν ἡμετέραν οἰκίαν, and for similar forms see the editor's note ® to 2b. 323. For the trans. use of the verb see such passages as P Oxy IV. 743!® (B.c. 2) εἰ καὶ m[p]ds ἄλλους εἶχον πρᾶγμα, βοηθὸν αὐτοῦ γ[εἸνέσθαι διὰ ἣν ἔχομε(ν) πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς φιλίαν, BGU I. 228(a.p. 114) (= «ϑελδείζογις, p. 74), which illustrate 1 Cor…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἔχω (echō) — to have/be.

ἔχω,

__A2nd pers. singular ἔχεισθα conjecture in [Refs 7th c.BC+]; 2nd pers. singular subjunctive ἔχῃσθα [Refs 8th c.BC+]imperfect εἶχον, Epic dialect ἔχον [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect and poetry ἔχεσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]future ἕξω, Epic dialect infinitive ἑξέμεναι [Refs 3rd c.BC+] (of momentary action, especially in sense check, see below [Refs 4th c.BC+], not found in Attic dialect Inscrr. or [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular σχήσησθα [Refs]aorist 1 ἔσχης α falsa lectio in [Refs 3rd c.AD+]aorist 2 ἔσχον, imperative σχές [Refs 5th c.BC+] only in Oracle texts cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; subjunctive σχῶ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural σχοίησαν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive σχεῖν [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect σχέμεν [Refs] (in Alexandr. Gr. 3rd.pers. plural imperfect and aorist 2 εἴχοσαν [NT+3rd c.BC+], see at {Σχέθω}: perfect ἔσχηκα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἔχω

echo

scheo skheh'-o; (used in certain tenses only)

a primary verb; to hold (used in very various applications, literally

or figuratively, direct or remote; such as possession; ability,

contiuity, relation, or condition):--be (able, X hold, possessed

with), accompany, + begin to amend, can(+ -not), X conceive, count,

diseased, do + eat, + enjoy, + fear, following, have, hold, keep, +

lack, + go to law, lie, + must needs, + of necessity, + need, next, +

recover, + reign, + rest, + return, X sick, take for, + tremble, +

uncircumcised, use.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἔχω

v.

I have, hold, possess

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἔχω echō 708x

pluperfect., ἐσχήκειν, to hold, Rev. 1:16; to seize, possess a person, Mk. 16:8; to have, possess, Mt. 7:29, et al. freq.; to have, have ready, be furnished with, Mt. 5:23; Jn. 5:36; 6:68; to have as a matter of crimination, Mt. 5:23; Mk. 11:25; to have at command, Mt. 27:65; to have the power, be able, Mt. 18:25; Lk. 14:14; Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-NPM — Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
29%having
having29% · 211×has9% · 62×have8% · 58×you have7% · 52×i have5% · 36×we have5% · 35×he has3% · 24×had3% · 21×other renderings30% · 217×

716 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 97 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb99%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 709 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,ἄρτοςbread, a loaf, fἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
Article the
ἄγγελοςan angel, messenαὐτόςκαίand, even, also,
μήNeg
Article theδέbut, on the otheπρόβατονa sheep
ὅς
καίand, even, also,ἐνεἰμίI am, exist
χρείαneed, necessity, bus
οὐNegαὐτόςὅς
ἔχωhaving709×
what comes after →
Article the
ἑπτάIndecυἱόςa son, descendenδέbut, on the othe
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὐNegὅς
ἐν
Article theἑαυτοῦΧριστόςanointed, the Me
οὖςthe ear
ἀκούωI hear, listen
ἐξουσίαpower, authority, we
Article theἀλλάbut, exceptἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, p

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἔχω · 709× in the New Testament
Revelation John Luke Matthew Mark 1 Corinthians Acts Hebrews 1 John Romans 2 Corinthians 1 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 11c. AD 40

ἀπεριμάχητον δὲ δόγμα καὶ ἀνωφελὲς ἀναρχίαν ὡς ἐν πόλει κατασκευάζον τῷδε τῷ κόσμῳ τὸν ἔφορον ἢ βραβευτὴν ἢ δικαστὴν οὐκ ἔχοντι, ὑφ’ οὗ πάντ’ οἰκονομεῖσθαι καὶ πρυτανεύεσθαι θέμις.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.11c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Gen. 1 20Pathyris110 BC

ἔτους η Μεχεὶρ β, ἐπὶ Σώσου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογεῖ Ἁρκοννῆσις Φιγήριος Πέρσης τῶν μισθοφόρων ἱππέων ἔχειν παρὰ Ναομσήσιος τῆς Σπεμμίνιος εἰς λύτρα τετάρτης μερίδος γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἐν τῆι κάτω

P.Bad. 2 3Pathyris110 BC

Μεχεὶρ β ἐν Παθύρει ἐπὶ Σώσου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογεῖ Ἁρκοννῆσις Φιγήριος Πέρσης τῶν μισθοφόρων ἱππέων ἔχειν παρὰ Ναομσήσιος τῆς Σπεμμίνιος εἰς λύτρα τετάρτης μερίδος γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἐν τῇ κάτω

P.Adl. 4Ptolemais (Oberägypten)110 BC

Ψεμμῖνις … ου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου χαίρειν. ὁμολογῶ ἔχειν παρὰ σοῦ χαλκοῦ νομίσματος τάλαντα τρῖα ἄτοκα ?. ταῦτα δέ ἐστιν ἃ προσωφείλετό σοι

not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
αὐξανομένηςauxanō increasing G837 Verb · present · passive · participle · genitive · singular · feminine
22× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To grow means to get bigger or increase, like a plant growing in Matthew 13:32 or a person's faith growing in 2 Corinthians 10:15.
Amplified meaning
grows, expands
Tyndale gloss
to grow
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word αὐξάνω (auxanō) means to grow or increase, both actively and passively. It is used in various contexts, such as the growth of plants (e.g., Mt 6:28), infants (e.g., Lk 1:80), and Christian character (e.g., Eph 4:15). The word can also refer to causing something to grow, as seen in 1 Corinthians 3:6-7. There is some variation in the forms of the verb, with both αὐξάνω and the earlier αὔξω being noted.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐξάνω

(and the earlier form αὔξω, Eph 2:21, Col 2:19; MM, s.v.),

[in LXX chiefly for פּרה;]

trans., to make to grow: I Co 3:6, 7, II Co 9:10. Pass., to grow, increase, become greater: Mt 13:32, Mk 4:8, II Co 10:15, Col 1:6; τῇ ἐπιγνώσει τ. θεοῦ, Col 1:10; εἰς σωτηρίαν, I Pe 2:2.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐξάνω, and earlier (the only form in Pind. and Soph. [Veitch s. v. says, ‘Hes. Mimnerm. Soph. Thue. always have av& or avfoua, and Pind. except αὐξάνοι Fr. 130 (Bergk)’}) αὔξω (Eph. ii. 21; Col. ii. 19) ; impf. nvéavov; fut. αὐξήσω ; 1 aor. ηὔξησα; [Pass., pres. αὐξάνομαι] ; 1 aor. ηὐξήθην; 1. trans. to cause to grow, to augment: 1 Co. iii. 6 sq.; 2Co.ix.10. Pass. to grow, increase, become greater: Mt. xiii. 32; Mk. iv.8 L T Tr WH; 2 Co.x. 15; Col. i. 6 [not Rec.]; εἰς τὴν ἐπίγνωσιν τοῦ θεοῦ unto the knowledge of God, Col. i. 10 (GL T Tr WH τῇ ἐπιγνώσει. τοῦ θεοῦ): εἰς σωτηρίαν [not Rec.] to the attaining of salvation, 1 Pet. ii. 2. 2. ace. to later usage (fr. Aristot. an. post. 1,13 p. 78°, 6, ete., down; but nowhere in Sept. (ef. B. 54 (47); 145 (127); W. § 38, 1}) intrans. to grow, increase: of plants, Mt. vi. 28; Mk. iv. 8 Rec.; Lk. xii. 27 [not Tdf.; Trmrg. br. αὐξ.} ; Lk. xiii.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐξάνω (auxanō) — to grow.

αὐξάνω

[Refs 5th c.BC+]:—also αὔξω (poetry ἀέξω, which see) [Refs 6th c.BC+] (so Attic dialect Inscrr. and Ptolemaic Papyrus; both forms in NT) imperfect ηὔξανον only Ps.-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ηὖξον[Refs 5th c.BC+]: future αὐξήσω[LXX+5th c.BC+]: aorist I ηὔξησα[Refs 6th c.BC+]: perfect ηὔξηκα[Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, αὐξάνομαι[Refs 5th c.BC+], imperfect ηὔξετο[Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect ηὔξημαι[Refs 5th c.BC+], Ionic dialect αὔξ-[Refs 5th c.BC+]: pluperfect ηὔξητο[Refs]: aorist ηὐξήθην[Refs 5th c.BC+]: future αὐξηθήσομαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]:—increase, not in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; opposed to ἰσχναίνειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐξάνω

auxano

a prolonged form of a primary verb; to grow ("wax"), i.e. enlarge

(literal or figurative, active or passive):--grow (up), (give the)

increase.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐξάνω

v.

I cause to increase, become greater, grow

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐξάνω auxanō 21x

also spelled αὔξω, trans. to cause to grow or increase; pass. to be increased, enlarged, Mt. 13:32; 1 Cor. 3:6, 7; intrans. to increase, grow, Mt. 6:28; Mk. 4:8

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐξάνω poet. ἀέξω q. v. to make large, increase, augment, Hdt., etc. (Hom. only uses ἀέξω).

to increase in power, strengthen, exalt, aggrandise, Hdt., attic: also to promote to honour, glorify, magnify, Trag., Plat.

Pass. to grow, wax, increase, Hes., Hdt., etc.; αὐξ. ἐς πλῆθος, ἐς ὕψος id. Hdt.; of a child, to grow up, id. Hdt.; ηὐξανόμην I grew taller, Ar.; so with an adj., αὐξάνεσθαι μέγας to wax great, Eur. Hence

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PPP-GSF — Verb · present · passive · participle · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PPP-GSF Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Passive Mood: Participle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
22%increasing
increasing22% · 5×continuing to grow13% · 3×growing9% · 2×they grow9% · 2×increased4% · 1×continuing to increase4% · 1×giving growth4% · 1×will increase4% · 1×other renderings30% · 7×

23 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb96%subject5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 22 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
καρποφορέωI bear fruitἀναβαίνωI go up, mount, ἑαυτοῦ
παιδίονa little child, an i
δέbut, on the othe
θεόςGod, a god
Article the
πῶς
ἀγρόςa field, the cou
δέbut, on the other ha
ὅτανwhen, whensoever
αὐξάνωincreasing22×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
κραταιόωI strengthen, coπληθύνωI increase, multφέρωI carry, bear, b
Article the
λαόςa people, the crγέννημαoffspring, childπίστιςfaith, belief, t
εἰς
ναόςa temple, shrineαὐτόςσωτηρίαdeliverance, sal
οὐNeg
κοπιάωI grow weary, to
μέγας
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐξάνω · 22× in the New Testament
Acts Colossians Luke 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Ephesians Matthew 1 Peter 2 Peter John Mark
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 32 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.227c. AD 40

σπέρματα βαλοῦμαι, φυτεύσω, αὐξήσει τὰ φυτά, καρποὺς ταῦτα οἴσει, οἳ οὐ μόνον εἰς ἀπόλαυσιν ἔσονται χρήσιμοι τὴν ἀναγκαίαν, ἀλλὰ καὶ πρὸς περιουσίαν ἀρκέσουσιν·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.60c. AD 75–95

οὐκ ἐπὶ νουθεσίᾳ δὲ τὴν κόλασιν ἔλαβεν, ἀλλʼ ἐπʼ αὐξήσει τῆς κακίας, ἡδονὴν μὲν πᾶσαν ἐκπορίζων αὐτοῦ τῷ σώματι, κἂν μεθʼ ὕβρεως τῶν συνόντων δέῃ ταύτην ἔχειν·

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 24.5c. AD 96

ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρων καὶ ἔβαλεν εἰς τὴν γῆν ἕκαστον τῶν σπερμάτων, ἅτινα πεσόντα εἰς τὴν γῆν ξηρὰ καὶ γυμνὰ διαλύεται: εἶτ̓ ἐκ τῆς διαλύσεως ἡ μεγαλειότης τῆς προνοίας τοῦ δεσπότου ἀνίστησιν αὐτά, καὶ ἐκ τοῦ ἑνὸς πλείονα αὔξει καὶ ἐκφέρει καρπόν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD
BIFAO 81 (1981) Suppl., p. 399-Ghoran oder Magdola (Arsinoites)326 BC–2 BC

ημεν μ … ριτου … … τησ … τας τὸ πλοῖον … … … αυξει … ας τὴν ἐνβολὴν ποιήσειν εἰς … … … … … μηπο

P. Münch. 3 65AD 101–AD 200

καὶ τοιαῦτα εἰς τὴν γῆν κατατεθῆναι … … αι δὲ καὶ τῶν ἐν αὐξήσει γενομένων … … ρω τὴν βοτανολογίαν γενέσθαι … καὶ ἐπι … εχ … αι

P.Hamb. 4 257AD 101–AD 300

r Αὐξάνων Θιᾶτι. καλῶς ἐποίησας ἀμελήσας περὶ τῆς διαγραφῆς ἂν καὶ νῦν ὡς ἐνετειλάμην σου τῷ

not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
τῆςho the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in 2 Corinthians as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
πίστεωςpistis faith G4102 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
243× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in 2 Corinthians as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Faith is the meaning of this word, which involves trust and confidence in God or Jesus Christ. It's used in Matthew 8:10 and Romans 1:8, showing reliance on God's power and promises.
Amplified meaning
trust, confidence
Tyndale gloss
faith
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πίστις (pistis) is a feminine noun meaning faith, belief, or trust, derived from the verb πείθω (to persuade). It encompasses a range of meanings, primarily focusing on religious faith in God or Christ, and includes concepts of fidelity and assurance. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, often linked to salvation and the Christian faith, as seen in verses like Matthew 8:10 and Romans 1:8.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πίστις, -εως, ἡ

(< πείθω),

[in LXX chiefly for אֱמוּנָה;]

in active sense, faith, belief, trust, confidence, in NT always of religious faith in God or Christ or spiritual things: Mt 8:10, Lk 5:20, Ac 14:9, Ro 1:8, I Co 2:5, II Co 1:24, I Ti 1:5, al.; c. gen. obj., Mk 11:22, Ac 3:16, Ro 3:22,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πίστις, -ews, 9, (πείθω [q-v-]), fr. [Hes., Theogn., Pind. ], Aeschyl., Hdt. down; Sept. for 93308, several times for Ax and IDR; faith; i.e. 1. conviction of the truth of anything, belief, (Plat., Polyb., Joseph., Plut.; θαυμάσια καὶ μείζω πίστεως, Diod. 1, 86); in the N. T. of a conviction or belief respecting man’s relationship to God and divine things, generally with the included idea of trust and holy fervor born of faith and conjoined with τὸς: Heb. xi. 1 (where πίστις is called ἐλπιζομένων trdcraces, πραγμάτων ἔλεγχος οὐ βλεπομένων) ; Opp. to εἶδος, 2 Co. vy. 7; joined with ἀγάπη and ἐλπίς, 1 Co. xiii. 13. a. when it relates to God, πίστις is the conviction that God exists and is the creator and ruler of all things, the provider and bestower of eternal salvation through Christ: Heb. xi. 6; xii. 2; xiii. 7; πίστις ἐπὶ θεόν, Heb. vi. 1; ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, by which ye…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πίστις. In accordance with its common NT usage, πίστις is used of ‘faith,’’ ‘‘ confidence” in a person in such passages as P Strass I. 4138 (c. A.D. 250), when in a legal process a witness is charged—as πρεσβύτης Kal πίστεως ἄξιος εἰπὲ ἃ οἶδας ἐν τῷ πρά[γματ]ι, and P Oxy XIV. τό27} (a.D. 342) διὰ τὴν περὶ ἡμᾶς μετριότητα καὶ πίστις (/. πίστιν), ‘owing to your clemency to us and confidence in us’’ (Edd.). In P Lond 233! (a.D. 345) (ΞΞ 11. p. 273, Chrest. I. p. 68) the editor translates τῇ σῇ πίστ(ε)ν as apparently = ‘‘at your discretion” or ‘“‘on your own credit.” P Tebt II. 418% (iii/A.D.) shows 5. ἀπολάβῃς παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ καλῇ πίστει, “‘receive it back from me in good faith’’ (Edd.): cf. P Oxy 1. 711: 11. (a.p. 303) νομίζουσα τούτους τὴν καλήν μοι πίστειν ἀποσώζειν, ‘thinking that they would preserve my good name” (Edd.). With the conjunction of πίστις and ἀλήθεια in τ Tim 27 cf. P Oxy I.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πίστις (pistis) — faith.

πίστις, ἡ,

genitive εως, Ionic dialect ιος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; dative πίστει, Ionic dialect πίστῑ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: (πείθομαι):—trust in others, faith, first in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: generally, persuasion of a thing, confidence, assurance, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ βεβαιοτάτη π., ἀταραξία καὶ π. βέβαιος, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; σωφροσύνης π. ἔχειν περί τινος to be persuaded of his probity, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. in subjective sense, good faith, trustworthiness, honesty, [Refs 6th c.BC+]

2. b of things, credence, credit, τὰν π. σμικρὰν παρ᾽ ἔμοιγ᾽ ἔχει [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. c καλῇ π., = Latin bona fide, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; αἱ κατὰ πίστιν γεινόμεναι κληρονομίαι, = Latin hereditates fideicommissariae, [Refs]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πίστις

pistis

from 3982; persuasion, i.e. credence; moral conviction (of religious

truth, or the truthfulness of God or a religious teacher), especially

reliance upon Christ for salvation; abstractly, constancy in such

profession; by extension, the system of religious (Gospel) truth

itself:--assurance, belief, believe, faith, fidelity.

see GREEK for 3982

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πίστις, εως, ἡ

n.f.

faith, belief, trust

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πίστις pistis 243x

faith, belief, firm persuasion, 2 Cor. 5:7; Heb. 11:1; assurance, firm conviction, Rom. 14:23; ground of belief, guarantee, assurance, Acts 17:31; good faith, honesty, integrity, Mt. 23:23; Gal. 5:22; Tit. 2:10; faithfulness, truthfulness, Rom. 3:3; in NT faith in God and Christ, Mt. 8:10; Acts 3:16, et al. freq.; ἡ πίστις, the…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πίστις πίστις, ιος, ἡ, πείθομαι trust in others, faith, Lat. fides, fiducia, Hes., Theogn., attic; c. gen. pers. faith or belief in one, Eur.:— generally, persuasion of a thing, confidence, assurance, Pind., attic

good faith, trustworthiness, faithfulness, honesty, Lat. fides, Theogn., Hdt., attic

in a commercial sense, credit, trust, πίστις τοσούτων χρημάτων ἐστί μοι παρά τινι I have credit for so much money with him, Dem.; εἰς πίστιν διδόναι τί τινι id. Dem.

in Theol. faith, belief, as opp. to sight and knowledge, NTest.

that which gives confidence: hence,

an assurance, pledge of good faith, warrant, guarantee, Soph., Eur.; πίστιν καὶ ὅρκια ποιεῖσθαι to make a treaty by exchange of assurances and oaths, Hdt.; οὔτε π. οὔθ᾽ ὅρκος μένει Ar.; πίστιν διδόναι to give assurances, Hdt.; διδόναι καὶ λαμβάνειν to…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

fath:

1. Etymology

2. Meaning: a Divergency

3. Faith in the Sense of Creed

4. A Leading Passage Explained

5. Remarks

6. Conclusion

In the Old Testament (the King James Version) the word occurs only twice: De 32:20 ('emun); Hab 2:4 ('emunah). In the latter the Revised Version (British and American) places in the margin the alternative rendering, "faithfulness." In the New Testament it is of very frequent occurrence, always representing pistis, with one exception in the King James Version (not the Revised Version (British and American)), Heb 10:23, where it represents elpis, "hope."

1. Etymology:

The history of the English word is rather interesting than important; use and contexts, alike for it and its Hebrew and Greek parallels, are…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Faith

Faith is in general the persuasion of the mind that a certain statement is true (Phil. 1:27; 2 Thess. 2:13). Its primary idea is trust. A thing is true, and therefore worthy of trust. It admits of many degrees up to full assurance of faith, in accordance with the evidence on which it rests.

Faith is the result of teaching (Rom. 10:14-17). Knowledge is an essential element in all faith, and is sometimes spoken of as an equivalent to faith (John 10:38; 1 John 2:3). Yet the two are distinguished in this respect, that faith includes in it assent, which is an act of the will in addition to the act of the understanding.…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The assent of the understanding to any truth. Religious faith is assent to the truth of divine revelation and of the events and doctrines contained in it. This may be merely historical, without producing any effect on our lives and conversation; and it is then a dead faith, such as even the devils have. But a living or saving faith not only believes the great doctrines of religion as true, but embraces them with the heart and affections; and is thus the source of sincere obedience to the divine will, exhibited in the life and conversation. Faith in Christ is a grace wrought in the heart by the Holy Spirit, whereby we receive Christ as our Savior, our Prophet, Priest, and King, and love and obey him as such. This living faith in Christ is the means of salvation-not meritoriously, but instrumentally. Without it there can be no forgiveness of sins, and no holiness of life; and they who are…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ General scriptures concerning 2Sa 22:31; Ps 2:12; 5:11; 7:1; 9:9,10; 18:30; 32:10; 33:18,19; 34:1-8,22; 36:7; 40:4; 64:10; 78:5-7; 84:5,12; 112:5,7,8; 118:8,9; 125:1; 147:11; Pr 3:5; 14:26; 22:19; 28:25; 29:25; 30:5; Isa 10:20; 14:32; 26:3; 30:15; 57:13; Jer 17:7,8; 39:18; Na 1:7; Mt 9:22; 21:21,22; Mr 9:23,24; 11:23,24; Lu 7:50; 8:48-50; 17:5; 18:8; Joh…

Across the New Testament24 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 24 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 57c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ μέγεθος τῆς περὶ τὸν ἥλιον δυνάμεως καὶ ἀρχῆς ἐμφανεστάτην πίστιν ἔχει τὴν λεχθεῖσαν ἤδη·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.14c. AD 75–95

τὸ σύνολον δὲ μάλιστά τις ἂν ἐκ ταύτης μάθοι τῆς ἱστορίας ἐθελήσας αὐτὴν διελθεῖν, ὅτι τοῖς μὲν θεοῦ γνώμῃ κατακολουθοῦσι καὶ τὰ καλῶς νομοθετηθέντα μὴ τολμῶσι παραβαίνειν πάντα κατορθοῦται πέρα πίστεως καὶ γέρας εὐδαιμονία πρόκειται παρὰ θεοῦ·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 5th c. AD
P.Fay. 122Euhemeria (Arsinoites)AD 100

Σισόιν τὸν τέκτονα ἀποτεῖσαι καὶ πέμψεις εἰς Χαλῶθιν ἐάν τινα εὕρῃς κατὰ παρόντας ἔχοντα πίστιν πολλήν, πέμψεις δὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν ρο … … πρὸ ἡμερῶν τριῶν … ες.

P.Mich. 3 188Bakchias (Arsinoites)AD 120

ὁμολογῶν Ἑρμᾶς ἀποδοῦναι τὸ προκίμενον ἀργύριον ἀποδότω σὺν καὶ τῶι προκιμένωι ἀργυρίῳ … τῆς πίστεως περὶ αὐτὴν τὴν Ταπεκῦσιν οὔσης. ὑπογραφεὺς τῆς Ταπεκύσιος καὶ τοῦ αὐτῆς κυρίου Ἀμμώνιος Διοσκύρου

P.Fam.Tebt. 27Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 132

δούλην Ἀθηνάριον ταύτην τοιαύτην ἀναπόρριφον πλὴν ἐπαφῆς καὶ ἱερᾶς νόσου τῆι ἰδίᾳ αὐτοῦ Οὐαλερίου πίστει ἧς ἐὰν εὕρῃ τιμῆς τοῖς προσελευσομένοις ἀγορασταῖς, τῆς βεβαιώσεως πάσῃ βεβαιώσει ἐξακολουθούσης τῇ Ἡρακλείᾳ,

not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
ὑμῶνsu of you G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · plural
2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.
Tyndale gloss
you
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-2GP — Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · plural
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2GP Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Genitive Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
78%you
you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg
ἐν
Article theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein
πρός
ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de
σύof you2892×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐν
ἐν
Article theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
ἐνen among G1722 Preposition
2,743× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word is a preposition that means in, on, or among something. It's used in many places, like Matthew 7:3 and Luke 7:37, to describe a location or relationship. It can also mean by, with, or during.
Tyndale gloss
in/on/among
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν,

prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).

Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐν (en) — in/on/among.

ἐν,

poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]

__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.

__A WITH DAT.

__A.I OF PLACE,

__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐν

en

a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or

state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or

constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519

and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +

almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+

all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,

-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,

one, X quickly,

X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),

through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,

with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same

import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate

direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)

preposition.

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐν

Prep.

in, on, among

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐν en 2x

followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐν

e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.

Lat. in.

PREP. WITH DAT.:

OF PLACE

in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.

in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.

in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.

in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.

in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

AMONG',

AMONGST', preposition [Gr. See Mingle.]

1. In a general or primitive sense, mixed or mingled with; as tares among wheat.

2. Conjoined or associated with, or making part of the number.

Blessed art thou among women. Luke 1:1.

3. Of the number; as, there is not one among a thousand, possessing the like qualities.

{ A‐mong″ , A‐mongst″ , } prep. [OE. amongist, amonges, amonge, among, AS. onmang, ongemang, gemang, in a crowd or mixture. For the ending -st see Amidst. See Mingle.] 1. Mixed or mingled; surrounded by.

They heard,

And from his presence hid themselves among

The thickest trees.

Milton.

2. Conjoined, or associated with, or making part of the number of; in the number or class of.

Blessed art thou among women.

Luke i. 28.

3. Expressing a relation of dispersion, distribution, etc.; also, a relation of reciprocal action.

What news among the merchants?

Shak.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
79%in
in79% · 2226×with5% · 135×among5% · 132×by4% · 112×on3% · 72×other renderings4% · 116×other renderings1% · 40×

2,833 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 36 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial82%predicate11%object3%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,743 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,πᾶςall, the whole, σύ
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύεἰμίI am, exist
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the othe
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,οὐNeg
ἐγώ
μετάπατήρfather, Father, εἰς
ἐνamong2743×
what comes after →
Article the
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaἡμέραa dayκαρδίαthe heart, inner
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,Article theμένωI remain, abide
σύ
εἰμίI am, existμένωI remain, abideκαίand, even, also,
ὅς
καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, existArticle the
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
Article theτόποςa placeσοφίαwisdom

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐν · 2,743× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Acts John Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Revelation Mark Ephesians Colossians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
ὑμῖνsu you G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · dative · plural
2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.
Tyndale gloss
you
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-2DP — Personal pronoun · second person · dative · plural
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2DP Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Dative Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
78%you
you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg
ἐν
Article theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein
πρός
ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de
σύyou2892×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐν
ἐν
Article theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
μεγαλυνθῆναιmegalunō to be enlarged G3170 Verb · aorist · passive · infinitive
8× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To magnify means to make something great or praise it, like Mary did in Luke 1:46. It can also mean to increase or show greatness.
Amplified meaning
be enlarged, magnified, abundantly, in excess
Tyndale gloss
to magnify
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word μεγαλύνω (megaluno) is derived from μέγας and means to make or declare great, to extol, or to magnify. It appears in various contexts, including the New Testament, where it is used in verses like Matthew 23:5 and Luke 1:46. The entries indicate that it can also imply gaining glory or being exalted.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μεγαλύνω

(< μέγας),

[in LXX chiefly for גּדל pi., hi.;]

to make great: Mt 23:5, Lk 1:58.

to declare great, extol, magnify: Lk 1:46, Ac 5:13 10:46 19:17, II Co 10:15; pass., seq. ἐν, Phl 1:20.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μεγαλύνω : impf. ἐμεγάλυνον ; Pass., [impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐμεγαλύνετο] ; μάχαι νομικαί, contentions pute: 1 aor. inf. μεγαλυνθῆναι ; 1 fut. μεγαλυνθήcopa; (μέγας) ; fr. [Aeschyl. and] Thue. down; Sept. mostly for 9°13; 1. tomake great, magnify, (Vulg. magnifico): τινά or τί, prop. of dimension, Mt. xxiii. 5 [here A.V. enlarge]; pass. to increase: of bodily stature, ἐμεγαλύνθη τὸ παιδάριον, 1 S. ii. 21; so in a figure, 2 Co. x. 15, of Paul, that his apostolie efficiency among the Corinthians may increase more and more and have more abundant results [al. refer this to 2; see Meyer (ed. Heinrici) in loc.]._ metaph. to make conspicuous: Lk. i. 58 (on which see ἔλεος, 2 a.). 2. to deem or declare great, i. 6. to esteem highly, to extol, laud, celebrate: Lk. i. 46; Acts v. 13; x.46; xix. 17, (often so in class. Grk. also); pass. i. 4. to get glory and praise: ἔν τινι, in ἃ thing, Phil. i.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μεγαλύνω (megalunō) — to magnify.

μεγᾰλύνω,

future μεγαλῠνῶ [LXX]aorist ἐμεγάλυνα[LXX]:—passive, future -υνθήσομαι[LXX]: aorist -ύνθην[LXX]: perfect participle μεμεγαλυμμένος [LXX+2nd c.AD+]: (μέγας):—make great or powerful, exalt, τοὺς πολεμίους [Refs 5th c.BC+] —passive, μεγαλύνεσθαι ἐκτῶν συμβαινόντων gain great glory by.., [NT+5th c.BC+]

II. make great by word, extol, magnify, τὸ ὄνομά τινος [LXX+5th c.BC+], [same places]:—middle, boast oneself, περί τινος [Refs 7th c.BC+]; γέννα in point of birth, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. magnify, exaggerate, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

μεγαλύνω

megaluno

from 3173; to make (or declare) great, i.e. increase or (figuratively)

extol:--enlarge, magnify, shew great.

see GREEK for 3173

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μεγαλύνω

v.

I enlarge, magnify, extol

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μεγαλύνω megalynō 8x

lit., to enlarge, amplify, Mt. 23:5; 2 Cor. 10:15; to manifest in an extraordinary degree, Lk. 1:58; fig., to magnify, exalt, extol, Lk. 1:46; Acts 5:13; Acts 10:46; 19:17; Phil. 1:20*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

μεγαλύνω μεγα^λύ_νω, only in pres. and imperf. μέγας to make great or powerful, to exalt, strengthen, Thuc.:— Pass., μεγαλύνεσθαι ἔκ τινος to gain great glory from . . , Xen.

to make great by word, to extol, magnify, Eur., Thuc., etc.:—Mid. to boast oneself, Aesch., Xen.

to aggravate a crime, Thuc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-APN — Verb · aorist · passive · infinitive
aorist passive infinitive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-APN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Passive Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5683

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%magnifying
magnifying25% · 2×being magnified13% · 1×be enlarged13% · 1×will be magnified13% · 1×enlarge13% · 1×magnifies13% · 1×magnified13% · 1×

8 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςγλῶσσαthe tongue, a la
ΜαρίαProp
λέγωI say, speak
ὅτιthat, since, because
αὐτός
ἀλλάbut, except
αὐτός
σύ
ἐν
μεγαλύνωto be enlarged
what comes after →
Article the
κράσπεδονthe fringe, edgeψυχήthe soul, life, θεόςGod, a god
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
Article the
αὐτός
Article the
κατά
Article the
Χριστόςanointed, the Messia
ἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμεγαλύνω · 8× in the New Testament
Acts Luke 2 Corinthians Matthew Philippians
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 41 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Clement of Rome Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Migration of Abraham 1c. AD 40

καὶ ποιήσω σε εἰς ἔθνος μέγα καὶ εὐλογήσω σε καὶ μεγαλυνῶ τὸ ὄνομά σου, καὶ ἔσῃ εὐλογητός.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 10.3c. AD 96

Ἄπελθε ἐκ τῆς γῆς σου καὶ ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας σου καὶ ἐκ τοῦ οἴκου τοῦ πατρός σου εἰς τὴν γῆν ἣν ἄν σοι δείξω: καὶ ποιήσω σε εἰς ἔθνος μέγα καὶ εὐλογήσω σε καὶ μεγαλυνῶ τὸ ὄνομά σου, καὶ ἔσῃ εὐλογημένος: καὶ εὐλογήσω τοὺς εὐλογοῦντάς σε καὶ…

not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
κατὰkata according to G2596 Preposition
473× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
According to means following or matching something. In the Bible, it's used to talk about things happening in line with God's plan or will, like in Matthew 8:32 and Mark 5:13.
Tyndale gloss
according to
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

κατά (kata) is a preposition used with the genitive and accusative cases, primarily meaning 'down' or 'against.' It indicates direction, motion, or relation, appearing in various contexts such as 'down from' (e.g., Mt 8:32) and 'against' (e.g., Mk 9:40). The word also conveys meanings like 'throughout' and 'according to.' Lexicons note its frequent use in the New Testament, with some variations in application.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κατά (bef. a vowel κατ’, καθ’; on the freq. neglect of elision, v. Tdf., Pr., 95; WH, App., 146a),

prep. c. gen., acc.,

down, downwards.

C. gen. (WM, § 47, k; Bl., § 42, 2).

C. gen. rei, in local sense;

down, down from: Mt 8:32, Mk 5:13, Lk 8:33, I Co 11:4;

throughout (late usage; Bl., § 42, 2): κ. ὅλης κ.τ.λ., Lk 4:14 23:5, Ac 9:31 10:37;

in a peculiar adjectival phrase: ἡ κ. βάθους πτωχεία, deep or extreme poverty, II Co 8:2.

C. gen. pers., usually in hostile sense;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κατά, [on its neglect of elision before a vowel see Tf. Proleg. p. 95; cf. W. § 5, 1a.; B.10; WH. App. p. 1405], a preposition denoting motion or diffusion or direction from the higher to the lower; as in class. Grk., joined with the gen. and the acc. I. With the Genitive (W. § 47, k. p. 381 (357); [B. § 147, 20]); 1. prop. a. down from, down: κατὰ κατά 8 τοῦ κρημνοῦ, Mt. viii. 32; ΜΚ. v.13; Lk. viii. 33; κατέχεεν κατὰ τῆς κεφαλῆς (so that it flowed down from his head [οἷς W. 381 (357) note]; but it is more correct here to omit κατά with LT Tr WH; see καταχέω), Mk. xiv. 3; hence κατὰ κεφαλῆς (a veil hanging down from his head) ἔχων, 1 Co. xi. 4 ([Δ. V. having his head covered] cf. καταπέτασμα [or rather κάλυμμα (q. v.), but 566 ἔχω I. 1b.]). Ὁ. down upon (down into) anything: Acts xxvii. 14 [W. 381 (357) note!; ef. B.D. Am. ed. s. ν. Crete]; trop. 7 κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία reaching down…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κατά, the favourite preposition of Polybius, by whom it is often used in place of ἐν, eis, and περί (Krebs Pra. p. 4), is also found with considerable variety of application in the NT, where it occurs 73 times c. gen., and 391 times c. acc. (cf. Proleg. p. 105). Brugmann (Awrze Vergletchende Grammazk, p. 479) considers that the earliest use of the word was “‘along ” something, so as to remain in connexion and contact with the object, and from this most of the senses found in the NT can be derived. I. (1) Turning to the construction c. gen. we find that the meaning ‘‘along” has passed into ‘‘down,” a usage not found in ΜΟΥ, in such passages as P Petr II. 18(26)!° (B.c. a ἐπιπεσὼν ἔτυπτεν [ad]t[o]v κατὰ τοῦ τραχήλου, Chest. τοῦ πνοήν: ἐξ Mt 8%, r Cor 114, 2 Cor 8%. (2) This in turn becomes ‘‘ against,” as in Mt τοῦδ, Mk 14°5, e.g. P Eleph 115 (B.c. 311-0) (= Se/ections, p. 4) ὅπου ἂν…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κατά (kata) — according to.

κατά [κᾰτᾰ],

poetry καταί accusative to [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: preposition with genitive or accusative:— downwards.

__A WITH GEN.,

__A.I denoting motion from above, down from, βῆ δὲ κατ᾽ Οὐλύμποιο καρήνων, κατ᾽ Ἰδαίων ὀρέων, βαλέειν κ. πέτρης, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καθ᾽ ἵππων ἀΐξαντε[Refs 5th c.BC+] — for κατ᾽ ἄκρης see.{ἄκρα}: Μοῖσα κ. στόματος Χέε νέκταρ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]

__A.II denoting downward motion,

__A.II.1 down upon or over, κ. Χθονὸς ὄμματα πήξας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of the dying, κατὰ.. ὀφθαλμῶν κέχυτ᾽ ἀχλύς a cloud settled upon the eyes, [Refs]; φᾶρος κὰκ κεφαλῆς εἴρυσσε down over.. , [Refs 8th c.BC+]; [κόπρος] κ. σπείους κέχυτο.. πολλή [Refs]; ὕδωρ κ. Χειρός, see at {Χεί; μύρον κ. τῆς κεφαλῆς καταχέαντες} [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

κατά

kata

a primary particle; (prepositionally) down (in place or time), in

varied relations (according to the case (genitive, dative or

accusative) with which it is joined):--about, according as (to),

after, against, (when they were) X alone, among, and, X apart, (even,

like) as (concerning, pertaining to touching), X aside, at, before,

beyond, by, to the charge of, (charita-)bly, concerning, + covered,

(dai-)ly, down, every, (+ far more) exceeding, X more excellent, for,

from ... to, godly, in(-asmuch, divers, every, -to, respect of), ...

by, after the manner of, + by any means, beyond (out of) measure, X

mightily, more, X natural, of (up-)on (X part), out (of every), over

against, (+ your) X own, + particularly, so, through(-oughout,

-oughout every), thus, (un-)to(-gether, -ward), X uttermost,

where(-by), with. In composition it retains many of these

Read the full entry →
Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κατά

Prep.

down from, against, according to, throughout, during

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κατά kata 473x

down from, Mt. 8:32; down upon, upon, Mk. 14:3; Acts 27:14; down into; κατὰ βάθους, profound, deepest, 2 Cor. 8:2; down over, throughout a space, Lk. 4:14; 23:5; concerning, in cases of pointed allegation, 1 Cor. 15:15; against, Mt. 12:30; by, in oaths, Mt. 26:63; with an acc. of place, in the quarter of, about, near, at, Lk. 10;32; Acts 2:10; throughout, Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
45%according to
according to45% · 215×against12% · 57×in9% · 42×every5% · 24×by5% · 23×on3% · 13×other renderings15% · 72×other renderings7% · 34×

480 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 48 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial86%object5%predicate5%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 473 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,πᾶςall, the whole, ἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
αὐτός
ποιέωI do, makeγυνήa woman, wife, mλαλέωI speak, say
καίand, even, also, nam
ἑκατόνIndecμέγαςσύ
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,ἀλλάbut, exceptἔρχομαιI come, go
ἐγώ
μετάσυλλαμβάνωI seize, appreheγίνομαιI come into bein
κατάaccording to473×
what comes after →
Article the
νόμοςa law, the Mosaiἔργονwork, labor, actαὐτός
σάρξflesh, body
περιπατέωI walk, conduct ζάωI liveοὐNeg
ἴδιοςone’s own, private,
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,δέbut, on the othe
ἡμέραa day
ἐνεἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,
αὐτός
ὅπωςhow, in order thκαίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speak

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκατά · 473× in the New Testament
Acts Romans Luke Hebrews Matthew 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Ephesians Mark Galatians Colossians Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 3c. AD 40

ἡ δ’ ἀρχή, καθάπερ ἔφην, ἐστὶ θαυμασιωτάτη κοσμοποιίαν περιέχουσα, ὡς καὶ τοῦ κόσμου τῷ νόμῳ καὶ τοῦ νόμου τῷ κόσμῳ συνᾴδοντος καὶ τοῦ νομίμου ἀνδρὸς εὐθὺς ὄντος κοσμοπολίτου πρὸς τὸ βούλημα τῆς φύσεως τὰς πράξεις ἀπευθύνοντος, καθ’ ἣν καὶ ὁ σύμπας…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.7c. AD 75–95

ἀλλʼ ἐπειδὴ μείζων ἦν ἡ τοῦδε τοῦ λόγου περιβολή, κατʼ αὐτὸν ἐκεῖνον χωρίσας ταῖς ἰδίαις ἀρχαῖς αὐτοῦ καὶ τῷ τέλει τὴν γραφὴν συνεμέτρησα·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 6th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἐπρίατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς Πανοβχούνιος ὡς ἐτῶν μ χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δύο . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πετεαρσεμθεὺς ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ἐπρίατο Πακοῖβις Πατοῦτος ὡς ἐτῶν λ χαλκοῦ δραχμῶν τρισχιλίων . προπωληταὶ καὶ βεβαιωταὶ τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Νεχούτης καὶ ὁ σὺν αὐτῷ οἱ ἀποδόμενοι, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

μελίχρως τετανὸς μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς δισχιλίας καὶ διακοσίας . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πανοβχοῦνις ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Εὔνους ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ

not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
τὸνho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in 2 Corinthians as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASM — Article · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
κανόναkanōn area G2583 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
4× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A standard or rule, like a measuring rod, used to guide faith and practice, as seen in Galatians 6:16. It can also mean a boundary or area of activity. The term is used to describe a guideline for living.
Amplified meaning
sphere of ministry, region of service
Tyndale gloss
rule
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

κανών (kanon) refers to a straight rod or bar, often used as a measuring tool or standard. In the New Testament, it signifies a boundary or sphere of activity, as seen in 2 Corinthians 10:13, 15, 16, and a rule of conduct in Galatians 6:16. The word is derived from a root meaning 'reed' and encompasses both literal and metaphorical uses.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κανών, -όνος, ὁ

(cf. κάννα, and Heb. קָנֶה, a reed),

[in LXX: Mi 7:4, Jth 13:6, IV Mac 7:21 (and in Aq., Ps 18 (19):5, Jb 38:5)*;]

a rod or bar (Jth 13:6).

a measuring rule; hence, metaph,

a rule or standard: Ga 6:16.

a limit (RV, province): II Co 10:13, 15, 16. (For the history of the word and esp. its later meanings, v. Westc., Canon, App. A; cf. also MM, Exp., xv; Cremer, 744.)†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κανών, -dvos, 6, (κάννα, Ilebr. ΤΡ a cane, reed; Arab. gS Sie $Lis a reed, and a spear, and a straight stick or staff [ef Vanitek, Fremdworter ete. Ῥ- 21]), prop. a rod or straight piece of rounded wood to which any thing is fastened to keep it straight; used for various purposes (see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v.); a measuring rod, rule; a carpenter’s line or measuring tape, Schol. on Eur. Hippol. 468; hence i. q. τὸ μέτρον τοῦ πηδήματος (Pollux, Onom. 3, 30, 151), the measure of a leap, as in the Olympic games; accordingly in the N. T. lia definitely bounded or fixed space within the limits of which one’s power or influence is confined ; the province assigned one; one’s sphere of activity: 2 Co. x. 13, 15 sq. 2. Metaph. any rule or standard, a principle or law of investigating, judging, living, acting, (often so in class. Grk., as rod καλοῦ, Eur. Hec. 602; ὅροι τῶν ἀγαθῶν x. κανόνες…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κανών (kanōn) — rule.

κᾰνών, όνος, ὁ,

straight rod, bar, especially to keep a thing straight:

1. in plural, staves which preserved the shape of the shield, [ἀσπίδα] δύω κανόνεσσ᾽ ἀραρυῖαν [Refs 8th c.BC+]

2. weaver's rod, to which alternate threads of the warp were attached, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

3. ruddled line used by masons or carpenters, πύργους.. ὀρθοῖσιν ἔθεμεν κανόσιν [Refs 5th c.BC+]rule, straight-edge, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὥστε τέκτονος παρὰ στάθμην ἰόντος ὀρθοῦται κ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κανόνεσσι.. μετρήσασθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μολίβδινος κ., i.e. a flexible rule that cannot be depended on for straight measurement, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

3. b ruler, [Refs 6th c.AD+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

κανών

kanon

from kane (a straight reed, i.e. rod); a rule ("canon"), i.e.

(figuratively) a standard (of faith and practice); by implication, a

boundary, i.e. (figuratively) a sphere (of activity):--line, rule.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κανών, όνος, ὁ

n.m.

rule, regulation, province

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κανών kanōn 4x

a measure, rule; in NT prescribed range of action or duty, 2 Cor. 10:13, 15, 16; met. rule of conduct or doctrine, Gal. 6:16*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

κανών κα^νών, όνος, κάννα any straight rod or bar:

in Hom. the κανόνες of a shield seem to have been two rods running across the hollow of the shield, through which the arm was passed.

a rod used in weaving, the shuttle or quill, by which the threads of the woof (πηνίον) were passed between those of the warp (μίτος), Il.

a rule used by masons or carpenters, Eur., Xen., etc.

a ruler, Anth.

metaph., ἀκτὶς ἡλίου, κανὼν σαφής, Milton's "long-levelled rule of light, " Eur.

the beam or tongue of the balance, Anth.

in pl. the keys or stops of the flute, id. Anth.

metaph., like Lat. regula, norma, a rule, standard of excellence, Eur.;—in Chronology, κανόνες χρονικοί were chief epochs or eras, Plut.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
60%area
area60% · 3×rule40% · 2×

5 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 4 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
μέτρονa measure, measuκατάὅσος
ἀλλότριοςbelonging to another
ἐν
κανώνarea
what comes after →
ὅς
μερίζωI divide, part,
ἐγώ
εἰς
εἰς
Article the
οὗτος
στοιχέωI walk

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκανών · 4× in the New Testament
2 Corinthians Galatians
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.233c. AD 40

Σηὼν οὖν ὁ διαφθείρων τὸν ὑγιῆ κανόνα τῆς ἀληθείας καὶ τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ ἀπολεῖται καὶ Ἐσεβὼν τὰ αἰνίγματα τὰ σοφιστικὰ ἕως Δεβών, ὃ καλεῖται δικασμός·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 10.49c. AD 75–95

τὴν δὲ φύσιν αὐτὸς ἄριστος ὑπῆρχε καὶ πρὸς ἀρετὴν εὖ γεγονὼς Δαυίδου τοῦ βασιλέως ἐπιτηδευμάτων καὶ σκοπῷ καὶ κανόνι τῆς ὅλης περὶ τὸν βίον ἐπιτηδεύσεως ἐκείνῳ κεχρημένος.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 7.2c. AD 96

διὸ ἀπολίπωμεν τὰς κενὰς καὶ ματαίας φροντίδας, καὶ ἔλθωμεν ἐπὶ τὸν εὐκλεῆ καὶ σεμνὸν τῆς παραδόσεως ἡμῶν κανόνα,

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD 5th c. AD 8th c. AD
P. Thead. 14ArsinoitesAD 254–AD 268

1 … παρόντων … Ἑρμείας εἶπεν· … κανόνι … … αμ … σαν ἑαυ… ιτη … ἡγεμόνι … της … εν

δηλῶ ὡς ἑξῆς ὑποτέτακται ἐντάξαντες καὶ τὴν γενομένην παράδοσιν κατὰ ἐκδοθείσας ἀποχάς. συνάγονται ὑπὲρ κανόνος ιζ ἔτους καὶ ε ἔτους καὶ γ ἔτους κωμητικῆς κτήσεως Καρανίδος βασιλικῆς σπορίμου ἄρουραι

P.Mich. 20 802OxyrhynchosAD 364

αἰωνίου Αὐγούστου παρειληφέναι παρὰ τῶν ἑξῆς ἐγγεγραμμένων καὶ ἐμβεβλῆσθαι εἰς τὸ ὑποτεταγμένον πλοῖον ἀπὸ κανόνος τῆς εὐτυχοῦς ζ νέας ἰνδικτίωνος σίτου νέου καθαροῦ ἀκρίθου καὶ ἀβρόχου καὶ ἐκτὸς πάσης

not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
ἡμῶνegō of us G3165 Personal pronoun · first person · genitive · plural
1,872× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
In plain English
Tyndale gloss
I/we
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐγώ, gen, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς,

pers. pron.

I.

The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mt 3:11, Mk 1:8, Lk 3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mt 10:16, Jo 10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. I Ki 3:8), Ac 9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jo 1:23 (LXX), Ac 7:32 (LXX).

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐγώ, gen. ἐμοῦ, enclitic pod; dat. ἐμοί, enclitic μοί; acc. ἐμέ, enclitic μέ; plur. ἡμεῖς, ete.; personal pronoun, J. 1. The nominatives ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, when joined to a verb, generally have force and emphasis, or indicate antithesis, as Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 8; Lk. iii. 16 (ἐγὼ pev... ὁ δέ); Mt. iii. 14 (ἐγὼ... ἔχω, καὶ σύν ; V. 22, 28, 39, and often; ἡμεῖς, contrasted with God, Mt. vi. 12; ἡμεῖς x. of Φαρισαῖοι, Mt. ix. 14; cf. W. § 22,6. But sometimes they are used where there is no emphasis or antithesis in them, as Mt. x. 16; Jn. x. 17; and in many edd. in Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; οἵ. B. §129, 12. ἰδοὺ ἐγώ, 1397, behold me, hereamT: Acts ix.10 (1S. iii. 8). ἐγώ, like 38, Jam: Jn. i. 23; Acts vii. 32, [ef. W.585 (544); B. 125 (109)]. 2. The enclitic (and monosyllabic) gen., dat., and ace. are connected with nouns, verbs, adverbs, but not with prepositions: ἔμπροσθέν pov, Jn. i. 15; ὀπίσω…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐγώ. Deissmann (ZAZ p. 134 ff.) has drawn attention to the parallels to the solemn use of the first personal pronoun in the Fourth Gospel that may be adduced from inscriptions and magical texts. Thus in an inscr. in honour of Isis from Ios, written in ii/iii A.p., the contents of which are preChristian, we find —Elows ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ τ[ύρανν]ος πάσης χόρας.. ἐγὼ νόμους ἀνθρώποις ἐθέμην . . ἐγώ εἰμι Kpdvov θυγάτηρ πρεσβυτάτη α΄. And similarly in the magical papyrus P Lond 4645 (iv/a.p.) (=I. p. 69) ἐγώ εἰμι ὃ ἀκέφαλος δαίμων . . ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἀλήθεια ὁ μεισῶν ἀδικήματα γείνεσθαι ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ α΄. With the construction of the phrase τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ; in Jn 24 we may compare BGU IV. 1141°8 (n.c. 14) ἐδίδουν αὐτῷ διαστολὰς μηδὲν αὐτῶι καὶ ἐκείνωι εἶναι : for its meaning see Ε΄. C. Burkitt in 77:5 xiii. p- 594f., where it is rendered, ‘‘ What have I and thou to do with that ?” On the difficult…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μέ (me) — me.

ἐγώ,

I: pronoun of the first person:—Epic dialect mostly ἐγών before vowels (so in Doric dialect, before consonants, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἱών [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:— strengthened ἔγωγε, I at least, for my part, indeed, for myself (more frequently in Attic dialect than in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Doric dialect ἐγώνγα [Refs 7th c.BC+]: Boeotian dialect ἱώνγα [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἱώνει [Refs]; ἰώγα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Laconian dialect and Tarentum dialect ἐγώνη, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. oblique cases from a different root, genitive ἐμοῦ, enclitic μο; Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, μευ, also ἐμέθεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ἔμεθεν [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect ἐμέος, ἐμεῦς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἐμοῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+] — _dative_ ἐμοί, enclitic μοι (which may be compared with Sanskrit…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐγώ

me

a shorter (and probably originally) from of 1691; me:--I, me, my.

see GREEK for 1691

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐγώ egō 2x

I, gen., ἐμοῦ [μου], dat., ἐμοί [μοι], acc., ἐμέ [με]

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-1GP — Personal pronoun · first person · genitive · plural
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-1GP Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: first Case: Genitive Number: Plural

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

US, pronoun objective case of we.

Give us this day our daily bread.

Us , pron. [OE. us, AS. s; akin to OFries. & OS. s, D. ons, G. uns, Icel. & Sw. oss, Dan. os, Goth. uns, L. nos we, us, Gr. we, Skr. nas us. . Cf. Nostrum, Our.] The persons speaking, regarded as an object; ourselves; — the objective case of we. See We. “Tell us a tale.” Chaucer.

Give us this day our daily bread. Matt. vi. 11.

Us, pron. oblique case of we

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
35%us
us35% · 717×me32% · 644×mine20% · 402×we ourselves6% · 124×my2% · 45×other renderings5% · 97×

2,029 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 27 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
εἰςeis to G1519 Preposition
1,766× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in 2 Corinthians as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means toward or into, indicating direction or purpose, as seen in Matthew 8:23 and Mark 1:45. It can also imply a sense of movement or action. The KJV translates it in various ways.
Tyndale gloss
toward
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰς is a preposition meaning 'into' or 'to,' used with the accusative case. It indicates direction, entrance, or limit, applicable to place, time, and figurative purposes. The New Testament frequently employs it to express movement toward locations or states, as seen in passages like Matthew 8:23. It can also denote relationships or results, such as 'for' or 'among.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰς,

prep. c. acc.,

expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, c. acc.).

Of place.

After verbs of motion;

of entrance into: Mt 8:23 9:7, Mk 1:45, Lk 2:15 8:31, al.;

of approach, to or towards: Mk 11:1, Lk 6:8 19:28, Jo 11:31 21:6, al.;

before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mk 4:7 8:19, 20, Lk 11:49, Jo 21:23, al.;

Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mt 8:18, 21:1, Mk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰς (eis) — toward.

ἐν εἰς

or ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is found in nearly all early Ionic dialect Inscrr. (except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and usually in Attic dialect Prose (except [Refs 5th c.BC+] is used before vowels for the sake of meter; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω), ἐς μακαρίαν. Aeolic dialect poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in Aeolic dialect εἰς, but spurious in Attic dialect-Ionic dialect) Radical sense into, and then more loosely, to:

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰς

eis

a primary preposition; to or into (indicating the point reached or

entered), of place, time, or (figuratively) purpose (result, etc.);

also in adverbial phrases:--(abundant-)ly, against, among, as, at,

(back-)ward, before, by, concerning, + continual, + far more

exceeding, for (intent, purpose), fore,

+ forth, in (among, at, unto, -so much that, -to), to the

intent that, + of one mind, + never, of, (up-)on, + perish, + set at

one again, (so) that, therefore(-unto), throughout, til, to (be, the

end, -ward), (here-)until(-to), ...ward, (where-)fore, with. Often

used in composition with the same general import, but only with verbs

(etc.) expressing motion (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰς

Prep.

into, in, among, till, for

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰς

into, to c. acc.

PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY. Radical sense, into, and then to:

OF PLACE, the commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Hom., etc.:—properly opposed to ἐκ, ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης from head to foot, Il.; εἰς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theocr.:—then, with all Verbs implying motion or direction, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, id. Il.:—in Hom. and Hdt. also c. acc. pers., where the attic use ὡς, πρός, παρά.

with Verbs which express rest in a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκε, i. e. he brought it into the house, and put it there, Od.; παρεῖναι ἐς τόπον to go to a place and be there, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%into
into33% · 595×to32% · 570×for10% · 185×in9% · 160×unto4% · 69×toward2% · 44×other renderings8% · 145×other renderings2% · 29×

1,797 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial95%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,766 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
βάλλωI cast, throw, rεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inδέbut, on the othe
εἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in, en
καίand, even, also,μήNegαὐτός
ἔρχομαιI come, go
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςοὗτος
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἐκκόπτωI cut out, cut oπόλιςa city
ἐγώ
εἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,δίδωμιI offer, give
εἰςto1766×
what comes after →
Article the
αἰώνan age, a cycle οἶκοςa house, househoοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,οὗτος
ἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem
καίand, even, also,εἰςὅτιthat, since, bec
ὅς
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἄνDisj
σύ
καίand, even, also,μήNegἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰς · 1,766× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew John Mark Romans Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Peter 1 Corinthians Ephesians

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι ἧς

BGU 3 999Pathyris100 BC

καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

ος, βορρᾶ γῆ Σχώτου τοῦ Τρύφωνος, ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς γῆς, λιβὸς ἡ φέρουσα εἰς τὸ Κρόνειον ὁδός, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου Πέρσης τῆς

not to the [things] beyond measure boasting in others’ labors, hope however having increasing the faith of you among you to be enlarged according to the area of us to excess,
περισσείαν,perisseia excess, G4050 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
4× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means having more than enough, or an excess of something. In the Bible, it is used to describe the abundance of God's grace and blessings, as seen in Romans 5:17 and 2 Corinthians 8:2. It refers to a surplus of good things.
Tyndale gloss
excess
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word περισσεία (perisseia) is derived from περισσεύω and means abundance or surplus. It appears in the New Testament in Romans, 2 Corinthians, and James, where it conveys the idea of superabundance or superfluity. The lexicons also note its use in the Septuagint, indicating a broader range of meanings, including superiority and profit.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

† περισσεία, -ας, ἡ

(< περισσεύω),

[in LXX: Ec12 (יִתְרוֹן and cogn. forms, 1:3, al.)*;]

abundance, superfluity: Ro 5:17, II Co 8:2 10:15, Ja 1:21 (so also Inscr., v. LAE, 80).

superiority (Ec, v. supr.);

profit (ib.).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

περισσεία, -as, 4, (περισσεύω, 4. V-) ; 1. abundance: τῆς χάριτος, Ro. v.17; τῆς χαρᾶς, 2 Co. viii. 2; εἰς περισσείαν, adverbially, superabundantly, superfluously, [A. V. out of measure], 2 Co. x. 15, (Boeckh, Corp. inserr. i. p. 668, no. 1378, 6; Byzant. writ). 2. superiorily ; preference, pre-eminence : \', Eccl. vi. 8; for yy, Heel. ii. 13; x. 10. 3. gain, profit: for jm, Heel. 1. 3; 11. 11; iii. 9, ete. 4. residue, remains : κακίας, the wickedness remaining over in the Christian from his state prior to conversion, Jas. i. 21, see περίσσευμα, 2; [al. adhere in this pass. to the meaning which the word bears elsewhere in the N. T. viz. ‘excess’, ‘superabundance,’ (A. V. superfluity) ].

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

περισσεία, “‘superfluity,” ‘‘surplus.” Though Grimm-Thayer (p. 695) include this subst. in their list of so-called ‘‘ Biblical’’ words, they inconsistently append the note ‘‘ Inscr.,” and Deissmann (ZA2Z, p. 80) has now furnished two interesting exx. from this source. The first is from C/G I. 1378, where a president of the games is described as—rhv περισσείαν ἀποδοὺς πᾶσαν τῇ πόλει τῶν ἀγωνοθετικῶν χρημάτων, ““Πανίηρ handed over to the city the whole surplus of the money belonging to the presidents of the games.” The second is again from a pagan inscr.. BCH xxi. (1897), p. 65 ἐκ περισειῶν (λ περισσειῶν), ‘ from superfluous (money).” Add /GSef¢ 322 ἐκ τῆς περισσήας.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

περισσεία (perisseia) — excess.

περισσ-εία, ἡ,

surplus, abundance, [NT]

II. advantage, [LXX]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

περισσεία

perisseia

from 4052; surplusage, i.e. superabundance:--abundance(-ant, (-ly)),

superfluity.

see GREEK for 4052

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

περισσεία, ας, ἡ

n.f.

abundance

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

περισσεία perisseia 4x

superabundance, Rom. 5:17; 2 Cor. 8:2; 10:15; Jas. 1:21*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

περισσεία περισσεία, ἡ, περισσός surplus, abundance, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%excess
excess100% · 4×

4 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object50%subject25%adverbial25%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 4 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
Article theθλῖψιςpersecution, aff
εἰς
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
ῥυπαρίαfilth, pollution
περισσείαexcess,
what comes after →
Article the
χάριςgrace, favor, kiχαράjoy, gladness
κακίαevil, wickedness, ma
ἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπερισσεία · 4× in the New Testament
2 Corinthians James Romans
Across the New Testament3 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
7th c. AD
CPR 36 16Hermopolites (?)AD 639

αἰγιδίων β καὶ ὑπὲρ ὀνόματος ι μοίρας προβάτων ιδ καὶ αἰγιδίων η καὶ κατὰ περισσείαν τὴν ἀνηλογίαν προβάτων β ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲍⲁⲭⲁⲣⲓⲁⲥ ⲡⲁⲡⲉ ⲧⲓστοιχεῖν ⲉⲧⲁⲓγνῶσις

CPR 30 10HermopolitesAD 643–AD 644

κατὰ περισσείαν δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν οὐκ … … … ἀνέλθω Θεοῦ κελεύοντος αὔριον … πέμψῃ μοι

P.Stras. 8 760HermopolitesAD 676–AD 700

ἠθέλησαν οἱ ἀπὸ Τελάεως … … νομίσματα ε καὶ ὡσαύτως κρατοῦντ … αιλοσημησιν κατὰ περισσείαν … γράψατέ μοι. νομίζω δὲ η … οὐδέποτε ἐποίησα ὑμῖν κ … βάλητε ξυλομάγγανα

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate